Math g1 m6 Full Module

New York State Common Core
1
GRADE
Mathematics Curriculum
GRADE 1 6
Table of Contents
GRADE 1 6
Place Value, Comparison, Addition and Subtraction to 100
........................................................................................................ 2
Topic A: Comparison Word Problems ....................................................................... 10
Topic B: Numbers to 120............................................................................................ 41
Topic C: Addition to 100 Using Place Value Understanding...................................... 132
Topic D: Varied Place Value Strategies for Addition to 100 ...................................... 214
Mid-Module Assessment and Rubric ....................................................................... 235
Topic E: Coins and Their Values................................................................................ 247
Topic F: Varied Problem Types Within 20 ................................................................ 302
End-of-Module Assessment and Rubric ................................................................... 341
Topic G: Culminating Experiences ............................................................................ 353
Answer Key .............................................................................................................. 375
Module 1: Place Value, Comparison, Addition and Subtraction to 100

1
2015 Great Minds. eureka-math.org This work is licensed under a

G1-M6-TE-1.3.0-06.2015 Creative Commons Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 3.0 Unported License.
1 6
Grade 1 Module 6
Place Value, Comparison, Addition
and Subtraction to 100
In this final module of the Grade 1 curriculum, students bring together their learning from Module 1 through
Module 5 to learn the most challenging Grade 1 standards and celebrate their progress.
In Topic A, students grapple with comparative word problem types ( ). While students solved some
comparative problem types during Module 3 and within the Application Problems in Module 5, this is their
first opportunity to name these types of problems and learn to represent comparisons using tape diagrams
with two tapes.
Students extend their understanding of and skill with tens and ones to numbers to 100 in Topic B ( ).
For example, they mentally find 10 more, 10 less, 1 more, and 1 less ( ) and compare numbers using
the symbols >, =, and < ( ). They then count and write numbers to 120 ( ) using both standard
numerals and the unit form.
In Topics C and D, students again extend their learning from Module 4 to the numbers to 100 to add and
subtract ( , ). They add pairs of two-digit numbers in which the ones digits sometimes have a
sum greater than 10, recording their work using various methods based on place value ( ). In Topic D,
students focus on using drawings, numbers, and words to solve, highlighting the role of place value, the
properties of addition, and related facts.
At the start of the second half of Module 6, students are introduced to nickels and quarters ( ), having
already used pennies and dimes in the context of their work with numbers to 40 in Module 4. Students use
their knowledge of tens and ones to explore decompositions of the values of coins. For example, they might
represent 25 cents using 1 quarter, 25 pennies, 2 dimes and 1 nickel, or 1 dime and 15 pennies.
In Topic F, students really dig into MP.1 and MP.3. The topic includes the more challenging compare with
bigger or smaller unknown word problem types, wherein more or less suggests the incorrect operation
( ), thus giving a context for more in-depth discussions and critiques. On the final day of this topic,
students work with varied problem types, sharing and explaining their strategies and reasoning. Peers ask
each other questions and defend their choices. The End-of-Module Assessment follows Topic F.
The module and year close with Topic G, wherein students celebrate their years worth of learning with fun
fluency festivities that equip them with games to maintain their fluency during the summer months prior to
Grade 2. To send home their years work, the final day is devoted to creating a math folder illustrating their
learning.

2

1 6
Notes on Pacing for Differentiation

During Module 4, addition and subtraction work is limited to numbers within 40. In Module 6, students
extend into numbers within 100. If students are readily able to apply their learning from Module 4 to Module
6, consider consolidating lessons in Topics A, B, and C (e.g., Lessons 3 and 4, Lessons 5 and 6, and Lessons 10
and 11). In Topic C, use each days Exit Ticket to determine whether the lessons that follow can be omitted or
consolidated.
Topic E, Coins and Their Values, might be modified, omitted, or embedded throughout the instructional day
depending on the standards in the state implementing the curriculum.

1 6
Use addition and subtraction within 20 to solve word problems involving situations of adding
to, taking from, putting together, taking apart, and comparing, with unknowns in all positions,
e.g., by using objects, drawings, and equations with a symbol for the unknown number to
represent the problem. (See CCSS-M Glossary, Table 1.)
Extend the counting sequence.

Count to 120, starting at any number less than 120. In this range, read and write numerals
and represent a number of objects with a written numeral.
Understand that the two digits of a two-digit number represent amounts of tens and ones.
Understand the following as special cases:
a. 10 can be thought of as a bundle of ten onescalled a ten.
c. The numbers 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90 refer to one, two, three, four, five, six,
seven, eight, or nine tens (and 0 ones).
1. . Compare two two-digit numbers based on meanings of the tens and ones digits, recording the
results of comparisons with the symbols >, =, and <.
understanding and properties of operations to add and subtract.

1. . Add within 100, including adding a two-digit number and a one-digit number, and adding a
two-digit number and a multiple of 10, using concrete models or drawings and strategies
based on place value, properties of operations, and/or the relationship between addition and
subtraction; relate the strategy to a written method and explain the reasoning used.
Understand that in adding two-digit numbers, one adds tens and tens, ones and ones; and
sometimes it is necessary to compose a ten.
Given a two-digit number, mentally find 10 more or 10 less than the number, without having
to count; explain the reasoning used.
Subtract multiples of 10 in the range 1090 from multiples of 10 in the range 1090 (positive
or zero differences), using concrete models or drawings and strategies based on place value,
properties of operations, and/or the relationship between addition and subtraction; relate the
strategy to a written method and explain the reasoning used.

1 6
.1
Tell and write time in hours and half-hours using analog and digital clocks. Recognize and
identify coins, their names, and their value.
Foundational Standards
Solve addition and subtraction word problems, and add and subtract within 10, e.g., by using
objects or drawings to represent the problem.
Decompose numbers less than or equal to 10 into pairs in more than one way, e.g., by using
objects or drawings, and record each decomposition by a drawing or equation (e.g., 5 = 2 + 3
and 5 = 4 + 1).
For any number from 1 to 9, find the number that makes 10 when added to the given number,
e.g., by using objects or drawings, and record the answer with a drawing or equation.
Compose and decompose numbers from 11 to 19 into ten ones and some further ones, e.g.,
by using objects or drawings, and record each composition or decomposition by a drawing or
equation (e.g., 18 = 10 + 8); understand that these numbers are composed of ten ones and
one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, or nine ones.
Focus Standards for Mathematical Practice

MP.1 Throughout Topic A, students
analyze given situations and determine whether they are compare, take away, or put together
problem types. Students drawings, such as single and double tape diagrams, represent their
planning toward a solution pathway. During Topic F, students initially work independently,
supporting them in learning how to persevere and make sense of problems. As students
share their strategies and solutions asking and answering peer questions, they demonstrate
understanding of the approaches of their peers and identify corresponding elements between
the approaches.
During Topic F, students
share their strategies and reasoning as they explain their solutions to various problem types.
They ask useful questions to help clarify or improve peers explanations, such as, How does
your drawing help demonstrate your thinking? Students consider how a selected students
work helped her solve the problem, as well as other pathways for the student to correctly
solve the problem. As students share their thinking, they explain the mathematical reasoning
that supports their argument.
1Time is addressed in Module 5. This module addresses the second portion of the standard, regarding money, which was added by
New York State. Check your state and local standards to determine whether money is an expectation for your students.

1 6
MP. Model with mathematics. Throughout this module, students model their mathematics in
various ways. While problem solving, students use tape diagrams and number sentences to
model situations and solutions. When sharing various strategies for adding within 100,
students use number bonds, number sentences, and sometimes drawings to solve for the
sums and to demonstrate their understanding and use of place value, properties of addition,
and the relationship between addition and subtraction as they decompose and recompose
numbers.
MP After learning varied representations and strategies for
adding and subtracting pairs of two-digit numbers, students choose their preferred methods
for representing and solving problems efficiently. As they share their strategies, students
explain their choice of making ten, adding tens and then ones, or adding ones and then tens.
They also demonstrate how their choice of written method (number bonds, vertical
alignment, or arrow notation) expresses their strategy work.
Standards Days
A 2
Lesson 1: Solve compare with difference unknown problem types.
Lesson 2: Solve compare with bigger or smaller unknown problem types.
B Numbers to 120 7
a Lesson 3: Use the place value chart to record and name tens and ones
within a two-digit number up to 100.
Lesson 4: Write and interpret two-digit numbers to 100 as addition
sentences that combine tens and ones.
Lesson 5: Identify 10 more, 10 less, 1 more, and 1 less than a two-digit
number within 100.
Lesson 6: Use the symbols >, =, and < to compare quantities and
numerals to 100.
Lesson 7: Count and write numbers to 120. Use Hide Zero cards to relate
numbers 0 to 20 to 100 to 120.
Lesson 8: Count to 120 in unit form using only tens and ones. Represent
numbers to 120 as tens and ones on the place value chart.
Lesson 9: Represent up to 120 objects with a written numeral.
C 8
Lesson 10: Add and subtract multiples of 10 from multiples of 10 to 100,
including dimes.

6

1 6
Standards Days
Lesson 11: Add a multiple of 10 to any two-digit number within 100.

Lesson 12: Add a pair of two-digit numbers when the ones digits have a
sum less than or equal to 10.
Lessons 1314: Add a pair of two-digit numbers when the ones digits have a
sum greater than 10 using decomposition.
Lesson 15: Add a pair of two-digit numbers when the ones digits have a
sum greater than 10 with drawing. Record the total below.
Lessons 1617: Add a pair of two-digit numbers when the ones digits have a
sum greater than 10 with drawing. Record the new ten below.
D Varied Place Value Strategies for Addition to 100 2

Lesson 18: Add a pair of two-digit numbers with varied sums in the ones,
and compare the results of different recording methods.
Lesson 19: Solve and share strategies for adding two-digit numbers with
varied sums.
Mid-Module Assessment: Topics AD (assessment 1 day, return 1 day, 3

remediation or further applications 1 day)
E 5
Lesson 20: Identify pennies, nickels, and dimes by their image, name, or
value. Decompose the values of nickels and dimes using
pennies and nickels.
Lesson 21: Identify quarters by their image, name, or value. Decompose
the value of a quarter using pennies, nickels, and dimes.
Lesson 22: Identify varied coins by their image, name, or value. Add one
cent to the value of any coin.
Lesson 23: Count on using pennies from any single coin.
Lesson 24: Use dimes and pennies as representations of numbers to 120.
F ithin 20 3
Lessons 2526: Solve compare with bigger or smaller unknown problem types.
Lesson 27: Share and critique peer strategies for solving problems of
varied types.
End-of-Module Assessment: Topics AF (assessment 1 day, return day, 2

remediation or further applications day)

7

1 6
Standards Days
G Culminating Experiences 3
Lessons 2829: Celebrate progress in fluency with adding and subtracting
within 10 (and 20). Organize engaging summer practice.
Lesson 30: Create folder covers for work to be taken home illustrating the
years learning.
Dime
Nickel
Penny
Quarter
2
<, >, = (less than, greater than, equal to)
100-bead Rekenrek
Tape diagram
Homework at the K1 level is not a convention in all schools. In this curriculum, homework is an opportunity
for additional practice of the content from the day's lesson. The teacher is encouraged, with the support of
parents, administrators, and colleagues, to discern the appropriate use of homework for his or her students.
Fluency exercises can also be considered as an alternative homework assignment.
2
These are terms and symbols students have seen previously.

8

1 6
Scaffolds
The scaffolds integrated into A Story of Units give alternatives for how students access information as well as
express and demonstrate their learning. Strategically placed margin notes are provided within each lesson
elaborating on the use of specific scaffolds at applicable times. They address many needs presented by
English language learners, students with disabilities, students performing above grade level, and students
performing below grade level. Many of the suggestions are organized by Universal Design for Learning (UDL)
principles and are applicable to more than one population. To read more about the approach to
differentiated instruction in A Story of Units, please refer to How to Implement A Story of Units.
Assessment Summary
Administered Format Standards Addressed
Mid-Module After Topic D Constructed response with rubric 1.OA.1
Assessment Task 1.NBT.1
1.NBT.2a
1.NBT.2c
1.NBT.3
1.NBT.4
1.NBT.5
1.NBT.6
End-of-Module After Topic F Constructed response with rubric 1.OA.1
Assessment Task 1.NBT.1
1.NBT.2a
1.NBT.2c
1.NBT.3
1.NBT.4
1.NBT.5
1.NBT.6
1.MD.3 4
3
Students with disabilities may require Braille, large print, audio, or special digital files. Please visit the website
www.p12.nysed.gov/specialed/aim for specific information on how to obtain student materials that satisfy the National
Instructional Materials Accessibility Standard (NIMAS) format.
4
Focus on money.

9

1
GRADE
GRADE 1 MODULE 6
Topic A
Comparison Word Problems
1.OA.1
Focus Standard: 1.OA.1 Use addition and subtraction within 20 to solve word problems involving situations of
adding to, taking from, putting together, taking apart, and comparing, with unknowns in
all positions, e.g., by using objects, drawings, and equations with a symbol for the
unknown number to represent the problem. (See CCSS-M Glossary, Table 1.)
Instructional Days: 2
Coherence -Links from: G1M3 Ordering and Comparing Length Measurements as Numbers
G1M4 Place Value, Comparison, Addition and Subtraction to 40
-Links to: G2M7 Problem Solving with Length, Money, and Data
Topic A of Module 6 opens with students exploring one of the most challenging problem types for their grade
level, comparison word problems (see Table 2 below from Counting and Cardinality and Operations and
Algebraic Thinking Progressions document, page 9) (1.OA.1). Students were informally introduced to the
problem type in Module 3 as they analyzed data and compared measurements. During Module 5, students
worked with comparison contexts through Application Problems. It is with this background that teachers can
make informed choices during Module 6 to support students in recognizing and solving comparison word
problems.
In Lesson 1, students work with compare with difference unknown problem types using double tape diagrams.
They then carry their understanding of double tape diagrams into Lesson 2 to tackle compare with bigger or
smaller unknown problem types. Throughout the module, students continue to practice these problem types
as they solve Application Problems in the topics that follow.
Topic A: Comparison Word Problems

10

G1-M6-TE-1.3.0-06.2015 Creative Commons Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 3.0 Unported.License.
NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Topic A 1 6

11

NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Topic A 1 6
A Teaching Sequence Toward Mastery of Comparison Word Problems
Objective 1: Solve compare with difference unknown problem types.

(Lesson 1)
Objective 2: Solve compare with bigger or smaller unknown problem types.

(Lesson 2)

12

NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Lesson 1 1 6
Lesson 1
Objective: Solve compare with difference unknown problem types.
Suggested Lesson Structure

Fluency Practice (12 minutes)
Concept Development (38 minutes)
Student Debrief (10 minutes)
Total Time (60 minutes)
Core Fluency Differentiated Practice Sets 1.OA.6 (5 minutes)

Number Bond Addition and Subtraction 1.OA.6 (5 minutes)
Happy Counting 1.NBT.1 (2 minutes)
Core Fluency Differentiated Practice Sets (5 minutes)

Materials: (S) Core Fluency Practice Sets
Note: Give the appropriate Practice Set to each student. Students who completed all questions correctly on
their most recent Practice Set should be given the next level of difficulty. All other students should try to
improve their scores on their current levels. Core Fluency Differentiated Practice Sets are used throughout
this module.
Students complete as many problems as they can in 90 seconds. Assign a counting pattern and start number
for early finishers, or have them practice make ten addition or subtraction on the back of their papers.
Collect and correct any Practice Sets completed within the allotted time.
Number Bond Addition and Subtraction (5 minutes)

Materials: (S) Personal white board, die per pair
Note: Practice with missing addends and subtraction helps prepare students to solve comparison problems
in todays Concept Development.
Assign partners of equal ability.
Allow partners to choose a number for their whole
(within 10) and roll the die to determine one of the
parts.

13

Both students write two addition and two subtraction sentences with a box representing the
unknown number in each equation and solve for the missing number.
Students exchange boards and check each others work.
Happy Counting (2 minutes)

Note: In this module, students add and subtract within 100 and extend their counting and number writing
skills to 120. Give students practice counting by ones and tens within 100. When Happy Counting by ones,
spend more time changing directions where changes in tens occur, which is typically more challenging.
Happy Count by ones the regular way and the Say Ten way between 60 and 100. Then, Happy Count by tens,
starting at a number with some ones (e.g., 78).
T:
T/S: 97 96 (pause) 97 98 (pause) 99 100 99 100 (etc.)
Materials: (T) 4 ten-sticks, 2 charts with todays story problems (S) Personal math toolkit with 4 ten-sticks,
personal white board
Note: Prepare two charts, one with the first story problem
about Rose and another with the second story problem about NOTES ON
Rose and Nikil. Save the second chart, with the solution, for
MULTIPLE MEANS
tomorrows lesson. Todays lesson objective is addressing word
problems. Therefore, there is no separate Application Problem. OF REPRESENTATION:
Some students may find it helpful to
Gather students in the meeting area with their materials. use linking cubes to represent the
problems. Students can use different
Problem 1: Model a change unknown problem with numerals color linking cubes for each part being
within the tape rather than dots. represented and then draw the tape
diagrams to match their concrete
T: (Post the chart with the story problem.) Lets read this
representations.
story problem together.
T/S: Rose wrote 8 letters to her friends. Her goal is to write
12 letters. How many more letters does she need to
write to meet her goal?
T: Use a tape diagram to solve how many more letters Rose needs to
write. You may also use your linking cubes to help draw and solve.
S: (Solve as the teacher circulates and notices various strategies.)

14

T: (Choose a student who used a tape diagram to solve. As the student shares, draw the tape diagram
on the chart paper.)
S: I drew a rectangle around 8 circles to show how many letters Rose already wrote. Then, I drew a
rectangle with a question mark because we need to find out how many more letters she needs to
write. Then, I put arms from the first part to the end of the second part because I knew that she
wants to write 12 letters. 8 + 4 = 12, so the answer is 4 letters.
T: Great. (Show a 12-stick of linking cubes made of 8 red and 4
yellow cubes.) I made a model of this story using linking cubes.
Watch me as I draw my tape diagram only using numbers. Read
the first sentence of the story problem.
S: Rose wrote 8 letters to her friends.
T: (Draw a tape, and label it R.) This represents the letters Rose wrote. What number should I write
inside? (Point to the linking cubes.)
S: 8.
T: (Write 8 inside the tape.) Read the next sentence.
S: Her goal is to write 12 letters.
T: Is that a part of how many letters she wants to write, or is it the total letters she wants to write?
S: The total.
T: So, that means there are some more letters Rose needs to
write. We just dont know how many more yet. (Draw
another part, write in a question mark, and label it M as
shown to the right. Point to the additional part of the linking
cubes.)
T: These two parts (point to each) make up the total of how
many letters?
S: 12 letters.
T: (Draw the arms with 12, and then hold the linking cube NOTES ON
stick at both ends, mimicking the arms drawn in the MULTIPLE MEANS
diagram.) What addition sentence helps find the OF REPRESENTATION:
missing part? To connect students use of linking
S: 8+ = 12. cubes to model the problem with the
tape diagram, write the numbers for
T: What is the subtraction number sentence to find the each part on stickers, and adhere the
missing part? stickers to each part while drawing the
S: 12 8 = 4. tape diagram. A sticker with a
T: How many more letters does Rose need to write? question mark can be used to
represent the unknown number.
S: 4 letters.
Problem 2: Model a compare with difference unknown problem.

T: (Post the second chart with the next story problem.) Lets read another story problem together.
T/S: Rose wrote 8 letters. Nikil wrote 12 letters. How many more letters did Nikil write than Rose?

15

T: Partner A, using one color, make a stick of how many letters Rose wrote. Partner B, using a different
color, make a stick to show the number of letters Nikil wrote. (Allow students time to make their
sticks.)
T: Lay the two sticks down on the personal white board so we can compare them easily.
T: I see that many of you put your sticks side by side so
that they are easier to compare. Lets all turn our
sticks the same way so we can talk about them
together. (Demonstrate by laying down the sticks
horizontally on a personal white board, as shown on
the right.) (Point to the 8-stick.) This stick represents
whose letters?
S: Roses.
T: (Label R on the personal white board as shown.) (Point to the 12-stick.) This stick represents?
S: Nikils letters.
T: (Label with N as shown.) Watch me as I use these cubes to help me draw my tape diagram to
compare the number of letters Rose and Nikil wrote. (Write R.) How many letters did Rose write?
S: 8 letters.
T: (Draw a rectangle, and write 8 inside.)
T: (Write N in the next line.) How many letters did Nikil write?
S: 12 letters.
T: Will his tape, his part, be longer or shorter than Roses tape, her part?
S: Longer!
T: Tell me when to stop when you think the length of the tape represents 12. (Begin drawing the tape.)
S: Stop!
T: (Stop at an appropriate length to represent 12, and complete the rectangle.) What number goes
with this tape?
S: 12.
T: The question says, How many more letters did Nikil
write than Rose? This tape (point to Roses tape)
represents 8, so this much of Nikils tape is also 8.
(Partition Nikils tape with a dotted line, and write 8.)
This part of Nikils tape represents how many more
letters he wrote. (Circle that part of Nikils tape, and
write a question mark as shown to the right.)
T: What is the total number of letters Nikil wrote?
S: 12 letters.
T: What is the part of Nikils letters that are the same number as Roses letters?
S: The 8 letters.

16

T: (Point to the question mark.) How many more letters did Nikil write than Rose? What can we do to
figure out the unknown part? Turn and talk to your partner.
S: I compared the linking cubes we made and counted the extra cubes. I counted on. There were 8,
and I counted on 4 more to get to 12. There were 4 more cubes. I thought 8 + = 12. Its 4.
I used subtraction. I took away 8 from 12 and got 4.
T: If we count on 4 more from 8, we are adding 8 + 4 to get 12. If we cover up the 8 to see how many
more letters he wrote, that is the same as taking away 8 from?
S: 12.
T: What is 12 8?
S: 4.
T: How many more letters did Nikil write?
S: 4 letters.
T: I want you to see that we can use subtraction to compare the number of letters Rose and Nikil
wrote.
T: Who wrote fewer letters?
S: Rose.
T: How do you know?
S: The tape diagram is shorter than Nikils. We know that Nikil wrote more, so Rose wrote fewer.
T: How many fewer letters did Rose write than Nikil?
How do you know?
S: Four fewer letters! Look at Roses tape diagram.
She needs 4 more to match Nikils tape diagram.
Eight is 4 less than 12. Nikil wrote 4 more letters, so
Rose wrote 4 fewer letters. Take away 8 from 12,
and that tells you how many fewer letters Rose wrote.
T: (Draw an invisible circle around the space after Roses tape that would be where the additional
letters would need to be for Rose to have the same number of letters as Nikil.) This part is the same
length as Nikils extra 4 letters. (In the image to the right, a dotted line is included to show where to
demonstrate the invisible circle.)
Repeat the process with the following story problems. For each problem, ask students to use the linking
cubes with their partners to represent the story. Guide them through drawing the double tape diagrams.
Tamra collected 9 seashells on the beach. Julio collected 11 seashells.
a. How many more seashells did Julio collect?
b. How many fewer seashells did Tamra collect?
c. How many seashells did Tamra and Julio collect? (This component provides a good contrast
between the comparison problem type and a put together problem type.)

17

Willie saw 13 leaping lizards at the park.

Fran saw 8 leaping lizards.
a. How many more lizards did Willie see?
b. How many fewer lizards did Fran see?
c. How many lizards did Willie and Fran see?
Problem Set (10 minutes)

Students should do their personal best to complete the
Problem Set within the allotted 10 minutes. Some
problems do not specify a method for solving. This is an
intentional reduction of scaffolding that invokes MP.5, Use
Appropriate Tools Strategically. Students should solve
these problems using the RDW approach used for
Application Problems.
For some classes, it may be appropriate to modify the
assignment by specifying which problems students should
work on first. With this option, let the purposeful
sequencing of the Problem Set guide the selections so
that problems continue to be scaffolded. Balance word
problems with other problem types to ensure a range of
practice. Consider assigning incomplete problems for
homework or at another time during the day.

Lesson Objective: Solve compare with difference unknown
problem types.
The Student Debrief is intended to invite reflection and
active processing of the total lesson experience.
Invite students to review their solutions for the Problem
Set. They should check work by comparing answers with a
partner before going over answers as a class. Look for
misconceptions or misunderstandings that can be
addressed in the Debrief. Guide students in a conversation
to debrief the Problem Set and process the lesson.

18

Any combination of the questions below may be used to lead the discussion.
Look at Problem 1. Using the same story, how many fewer goats does Peter have than Julio? What
do you notice about the answer to the question in the problem and this new question? Explain your
thinking. How was setting up Problem 3 similar to and different from setting up Problems 1 and 2?
What did you need to be sure to do? Why?
When we know the total and just one of the parts, what strategy did we use to solve for the missing
part?
When two tapes are arranged one above the other like the ones we used today, we call that a double
tape diagram. How does setting up our two tapes this way help you compare more easily?
Exit Ticket (3 minutes)

After the Student Debrief, instruct students to complete the Exit Ticket. A review of their work will help with
assessing students understanding of the concepts that were presented in todays lesson and planning more
effectively for future lessons. The questions may be read aloud to the students.
Homework
Homework at the K1 level is not a convention in all schools. In this curriculum, homework is an opportunity
for additional practice of the content from the day's lesson. The teacher is encouraged, with the support of
parents, administrators, and colleagues, to discern the appropriate use of homework for his or her
students. Fluency exercises can also be considered as an alternative homework assignment.

19

NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Lesson 1 Core Fluency Practice Set A 16
Name Date
My Addition Practice
1. 6+0= 11. 7 + 1 = 21. 5+3=
2. 0+6= 12. =1+7 22. =5+4
3. 5+1= 13. 3+3= 23. 6 + 4 =
4. 1+5= 14. 3+4= 24. 4 + 6 =
5. 6+1= 15. =3+5 25. =4+4
6. 1+6= 16. 6+3= 26. 3 + 4 =
7. 6+2= 17. 7+3= 27. 5 + 5 =
8. 5+2= 18. =7+2 28. =4+5
9. 2+5= 19. 2+7= 29. 3 + 7 =
10. 2 + 4 = 20. 2 + 8 = 30. =3+6
Today I finished problems.
I solved problems correctly.

20

NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Lesson 1 Core Fluency Practice Set B 16
Name Date
My Missing Addend Practice
1. 6+ =6 11. 3 + =6 21. 4+ =7
2. 0+ =6 12. 4+ =8 22. 7 = 3 +
3. 5+ =6 13. 10 = 5 + 23. 2 + =7
4. 4+ =6 14. 5+ =9 24. 2 + =8
5. 0+ =7 15. 5+ =7 25. 9 = 2 +
6. 6+ =7 16. 8=5+ 26. 2 + = 10
7. 1+ =7 17. 5+ =9 27. 10 = 3 +
8. 7+ =8 18. 8+ = 10 28. 3 + =9
9. 1+ =8 19. 7+ = 10 29. 4 + =9
10. 6 + =8 20. 10 = 6 + 30. 10 = 4 +

21

NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Lesson 1 Core Fluency Practice Set C 16
Name Date
My Related Addition and Subtraction Practice
1. 5+ =6 11. 7 + = 10 21. 4+ =8
2. 1+ =6 12. 10 7 = 22. 8 4 =
3. 61= 13. 5+ =7 23. 4 + =7
4. 9+ = 10 14. 75= 24. 7 4 =
5. 1+ = 10 15. 5+ =8 25. 5 + =9
6. 10 9 = 16. 85= 26. 9 5 =
7. 5+ = 10 17. 4+ =6 27. 6 + =9
8. 10 5 = 18. 64= 28. 9 6 =
9. 8+ = 10 19. 3+ =6 29. 4 + =7
10. 10 8 = 20. 6 3 = 30. 7 4 =

22

NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Lesson 1 Core Fluency Practice Set D 16
Name Date
My Subtraction Practice
1. 60= 11. 6 3 = 21. 84=
2. 61= 12. 73= 22. 8 3 =
3. 71= 13. 93= 23. 8 5 =
4. 81= 14. 10 8 = 24. 9 5 =
5. 62= 15. 10 6 = 25. 9 4 =
6. 72= 16. 10 4 = 26. 7 3 =
7. 92= 17. 10 5 = 27. 10 7 =
8. 10 10 = 18. 76= 28. 9 7 =
9. 10 9 = 19. 75= 29. 9 6 =
10. 10 7 = 20. 6 4 = 30. 8 6 =

23

NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Lesson 1 Core Fluency Practice Set E 16
Name Date
My Mixed Practice
1. 4+2= 11. 2 + =6 21. 85=
2. 2+ =6 12. 62= 22. 3 + =8
3. 6=3+ 13. 64= 23. 8 = +5
4. 2+5= 14. 5+ =7 24. +2=9
5. 7=5+ 15. 75= 25. 9 = +7
6. 4+3= 16. 74= 26. 9 2 =
7. 7= +4 17. 73= 27. 9 7 =
8. 8= +4 18. 8=6+ 28. 9 6 =
9. 4+5= 19. 82= 29. 9 = +4
10. 9 = +4 20. 8 6 = 30. 9 6 =

24

NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Lesson 1 Problem Set 16
Name Date
Read the word problem.

Draw a tape diagram or double tape diagram and label.
Write a number sentence and a statement that matches the
story.
1. Peter has 3 goats living on his farm. Julio has 9 goats living on his farm.
How many more goats does Julio have than Peter?
2. Willie picked 16 apples in the orchard. Emi picked 10 apples in the orchard.
How many more apples did Willie pick than Emi?

25

3. Lee collected 13 eggs from the hens in the barn. Ben collected 18 eggs from the
hens in the barn. How many fewer eggs did Lee collect than Ben?
4. Shanika did 14 cartwheels during recess. Kim did 20 cartwheels. How many more
cartwheels did Kim do than Shanika?

26

NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Lesson 1 Exit Ticket 16
Name Date

story.
Anton drove around the racetrack 12 times during the race. Rose drove around the
racetrack 17 times. How many more times did Rose go around the racetrack
than Anton?

27

NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Lesson 1 Homework 16
Name Date

story.
1. Fran donated 11 of her old books to the library. Darnel donated 8 of his old books
to the library. How many more books did Fran donate than Darnel?
2. During recess, 7 students were reading books. There were 17 students playing on
the playground. How many fewer students were reading books than playing on the
playground?

28

3. Maria is 18 years old. Her brother Nikil is 12 years old. How much older is Maria
than her brother Nikil?
4. It rained 15 days in the month of March. It rained 19 days in April. How many
more days did it rain in April than in March?

29

NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Lesson 2 16
Lesson 2
Objective: Solve compare with bigger or smaller unknown problem types.


Number Bond Addition and Subtraction 1.OA.6 (5 minutes)
Happy Counting 1.NBT.1 (2 minutes)

Materials: (S) Core Fluency Practice Sets (Lesson 1)
Note: Give the appropriate Practice Set to each student. Help students become aware of their improvement.
After students finish todays Practice Sets, ask them to raise their hands if they tried a new level today or
improved their score from the previous day.
Number Bond Addition and Subtraction (5 minutes)

Materials: (S) Personal white board, die per pair
Note: Practice with missing addends and subtraction helps prepare students to solve comparison problems
in todays Concept Development.
Conduct the activity as directed in Lesson 1.

30

Happy Counting (2 minutes)

Note: In this module, students do addition and subtraction within 100 and extend their counting and number
writing skills to 120. Give students practice counting by ones and tens within 100. When Happy Counting by
ones, spend more time changing directions where changes in tens occur, which is typically more challenging.
Conduct the activity as directed in Lesson 1.
Materials: (T) Chart with Lesson 1s tape diagram and Problem 2, chart with todays Problems 2 and 3, 4 ten-
sticks (S) Personal math toolkit with 4 ten-sticks, personal white board
Note: Todays lesson objective is addressing word problems. Therefore, there is no separate Application
Problem.
Gather students in the meeting area with their materials.
Problem 1
T: (Post the tape diagram from yesterdays Concept Development,
Problem 2.)
T: What was the story that went with this tape diagram, in the last
lesson?
S: Rose and Nikil both wrote letters. Rose wrote 8 letters, and Nikil
wrote 12 letters. How many more letters did Nikil write than
Rose? We also answered how many fewer letters Rose wrote
than Nikil. We also figured out how many letters Nikil and Rose
wrote in all.
T: Great! I have a new problem for you. (Point to the diagram as you speak.) Rose wrote 8 letters.
Nikil wrote 4 more letters than Rose. How many letters did Nikil write? Turn and talk with your
partner. (Wait as students discuss.)
T: If Rose wrote 8 letters, and Nikil wrote 4 more letters
than Rose, how many letters did Nikil write? NOTES ON
S: 12 letters! MULTIPLE MEANS
OF ACTION AND
T: How do you know?
EXPRESSION:
S: You have to add Roses 8 letters and then 4 more.
If students struggle with word
You can look at the tape diagram on the chart. Nikil
problems, consider using either smaller
has the same 8 letters as Rose plus 4 more letters. numbers or encouraging students to
T: In the last lesson, you subtracted to find the difference include circle representations for the
between the two sets of letters. Is that what you did objects, and then draw rectangles
this time? Talk with a partner, and decide what around the circles to create the tape
number sentence you needed to use. (Wait as diagrams.
students discuss.)
S: We needed to add this time. Eight letters plus 4 more letters is 12 letters. 8 + 4 = 12.

31

Problem 2
T: Lets try another one. This time, use your linking cubes with a partner. Each of you will show linking
cubes for your character.
T/S: Ben solved 6 math problems. Robin solved 4 more problems than Ben. How many problems did
Robin solve?
T: Partner A, represent the problems Ben solved. Partner B, represent the problems Robin solved.
Then, use your linking cubes to try to solve the problem together. (Circulate as students work to
solve the problem. Remind them to read each sentence to recheck their work, making sure that
their cubes match every part of the story.)
T: Lets draw a tape diagram to show what you just did. Who is this story about?
S: Ben and Robin.
T: (Write B and R to start a double tape diagram.) I like that most of you remembered to label your
parts.
T: They each solved math problems. (Draw the same size rectangle next to each letter. This will help
highlight the parts that are the same as well as the additional part that will be in Robins tape.)
T: What do you notice about these two tapes?
S: They are the same size!
T: The same size tape means they solved the same amount of problems. Is this true?
S: No!
T: Who solved more problems?
S: Robin!
T: You are right! Im going to add an extra part of tape next to Robins to show that she solved more
problems than Ben. (Draw.) How many more problems did Robin solve?
S: Four more problems.
T: Lets go back to our story. Read the first sentence.
S: Ben solved 6 math problems.
T: What information can I add to my double tape diagram?
S: Write 6 in Bens tape!
T: Where else can I write in the 6? Turn and talk to your partner, and explain why.
S: Write 6 in the first part of Robins tape. Its the same size as Bens tape, so it makes sense to put
6 there, too. It makes sense to put 6 in Robins first rectangle because the story says she solved 4
more than Ben. It has to show 4 more than 6 since 6 stands for how many problems Ben solved.
T: Great. (Write 6 in the first part of Robins tape.) Does this match the linking cubes on your personal
white board?
S: Yes!
T: If it doesnt, this is a good time to fix your model.
T: As I read each part of the story problem again, touch the part of the
double tape model on your board that corresponds to what Im
saying.

32

T/S: (Read each sentence, and have students point to the parts of
their tape model.)
T: Write a number sentence that helped you find how many
problems Robin solved.
S: 6 + 4 = 10.
T: How many problems did Robin solve?
S: Ten problems! (As students write 10 on the personal white
board next to their model, add 10 to their double tape
diagram as shown.)
Problem 3
T: Lets read another story problem together.
T/S: Tamra found 12 ladybugs. Willie found 4 fewer NOTES ON
ladybugs than Tamra. How many ladybugs did Willie MULTIPLE MEANS
find? OF REPRESENTATION:
T: Who are the children in this story problem? Solving problems with the word fewer
S: Tamra and Willie! can be difficult, especially for English
language learners. When solving
T: (Record T and W to begin a double tape diagram, and
problems of this type, teach students
draw two equal size rectangles.)
to always focus on who has more.
T: Is it true that they found the same number of For example, after reading the
ladybugs? problem, before solving, have students
S: No! look at who has fewer and who has
more. Establishing this before solving
T: Who found more ladybugs? Read the story carefully makes sure students really understand
again. Then, turn and talk to your partner. how to solve this problem type.
S: Tamra. It didnt say Tamra found more. But it said
Willie found 4 fewer ladybugs. That means Tamra
found more.
T: Great thinking! I need to add an extra tape, the more
tape, onto ?
S: Tamras tape!
T: (Add an extra box.) How many more ladybugs did Tamra
find than Willie?
S: 4 more ladybugs.
T: (Record 4 in the extra tape.) Lets read the first sentence of
the story.
T/S: Tamra found 12 ladybugs.
T: Take a look at Tamras tape. Turn and talk to your partner about where the 12 should go.
S: It should go inside the first part of the tape. No. It should go outside like we did yesterday for
Nikils 12 letters. Twelve is the total number of ladybugs, so we need to put the arms around the
entire tape for Tamra.

33

T: Hmm, lets try the first idea and see. (Write 12 in the first tape.) According to Tamras tape now, did
she find 12 ladybugs?
S: No. It looks like she found 16 ladybugs.
T: You are right. Is 12 the total amount of ladybugs Tamra found or just a part?
S: The total.
T: Lets try the other suggestion.
T: (Make a bracket with 12 for Tamras tape.) Does this show that Tamra found a total of 12 ladybugs?
S: Yes!
T: Read the next sentence.
S: Willie found 4 fewer ladybugs than Tamra.
T: Did we show that in our double tape diagram?
S: Yes!
T: Read the last part of our story problem.
S: How many ladybugs did Willie find?
T: (Record a question mark in Willies tape.) Look at Willies tape. What do you notice about the size
of the tape?
S: Its the same as the first part of Tamras tape.
T: If we find out what the missing part for Tamras tape is, then we are also finding out?
S: Willies tape.
T: How can we find this missing part of Tamras tape? Turn and talk to your partner.
S: I did 4 + ___ = 12. The answer is 8. I used subtraction to find the missing part. 12 4 = 8.
The missing part is 8.
T: Great. If this part is 8 (fill in the 8 to complete Tamras tape), then what else is 8?
S: Willies tape!
T: So, how many ladybugs did Willie find?
S: 8 ladybugs!
Repeat the process by using the following story problems. For each problem, guide students through drawing
the double tape diagram.
Shanika used 11 blocks to build a house. Julio used 5 more blocks than Shanika. How many blocks
did Julio use?
Darnel caught 10 fewer fish than Fran. Fran caught 16 fish. How many fish did Darnel catch?
Maria found 9 flowers in the garden. Kiana found 12 flowers. How many more flowers did Kiana
find than Maria?

Students should do their personal best to complete the Problem Set within the allotted 10 minutes. For some
classes, it may be appropriate to modify the assignment by specifying which problems they work on first.
Some problems do not specify a method for solving. Students should solve these problems using the RDW
approach used for Application Problems.

34

Lesson Objective: Solve compare with bigger or smaller

unknown problem types.
Set. They should check work by comparing answers
with a partner before going over answers as a class.
Look for misconceptions or misunderstandings that can
be addressed in the Debrief. Guide students in a
conversation to debrief the Problem Set and process
the lesson.
Any combination of the questions below may be used to
lead the discussion.
Look at Problems 1 and 2. How was drawing
Nikils tape and Emis tape different? Explain why
this is so.
How was setting up the tape diagram from
Problem 3 different from Problem 1?
Explain to your partner how you solved
Problem 6.
In which problem were you able to use your
doubles or doubles plus 1 facts to solve?
How did working on number bond addition and
subtraction in todays fluency activity help you
with solving todays story problems?

After the Student Debrief, instruct students to complete
the Exit Ticket. A review of their work will help with
assessing students understanding of the concepts that
were presented in todays lesson and planning more
effectively for future lessons. The questions may be read
aloud to the students.

35

Name Date

Write a number sentence and a statement that matches the story.
1. Nikil baked 5 pies for the contest. Peter baked 3 more pies than Nikil.
How many pies did Peter bake for the contest?
2. Emi planted 12 flowers. Rose planted 3 fewer flowers than Emi.

How many flowers did Rose plant?
3. Ben scored 15 goals in the soccer game. Anton scored 11 goals.

How many more goals did Ben score than Anton?

36

4. Kim grew 12 roses in a garden. Fran grew 6 fewer roses than Kim.
How many roses did Fran grow in the garden?
5. Maria has 4 more fish in her tank than Shanika. Shanika has 16 fish.
How many fish does Maria have in her tank?
6. Lee has 11 board games. Lee has 5 more board games than Darnel.
How many board games does Darnel have?

37

Name Date

Tamra decorated 13 cookies. Kiana decorated 5 fewer cookies than Tamra. How many
cookies did Kiana decorate?

38

Name Date

1. Kim went to 15 baseball games this summer. Julio went to 10 baseball games.
How many more games did Kim go to than Julio?
2. Kiana picked 14 strawberries at the farm. Tamra picked 5 fewer strawberries than
Kiana. How many strawberries did Tamra pick?
3. Willie saw 7 reptiles at the zoo. Emi saw 4 more reptiles at the zoo than Willie.
How many reptiles did Emi see at the zoo?

39

4. Peter jumped into the swimming pool 6 times more than Darnel. Darnel jumped in
9 times. How many times did Peter jump into the swimming pool?
5. Rose found 16 seashells on the beach. Lee found 6 fewer seashells than Rose.
How many seashells did Lee find on the beach?
6. Shanika got 12 cards in the mail. Nikil got 5 more cards than Shanika.
How many cards did Nikil get?

40

1
GRADE
GRADE 1 MODULE 6
Topic B
Numbers to 120
1.NBT.1, 1.NBT.2a, 1.NBT.2c, 1.NBT.3, 1.NBT.5
Focus Standards: 1.NBT.1 Count to 120, starting at any number less than 120. In this range, read and write
numerals and represent a number of objects with a written numeral.
1.NBT.2 Understand that the two digits of a two-digit number represent amounts of tens and
ones. Understand the following as special cases:
c. The numbers 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90 refer to one, two, three, four, five,
six, seven, eight, or nine tens (and 0 ones).
1.NBT.3 Compare two two-digit numbers based on meanings of the tens and ones digits,
recording the results of comparisons with the symbols >, =, and <.
1.NBT.5 Given a two-digit number, mentally find 10 more or 10 less than the number, without
having to count; explain the reasoning used.
Coherence -Links from: G1M4 Place Value, Comparison, Addition and Subtraction of Numbers to 40
-Links to: G2M3 Place Value, Counting, and Comparison of Numbers to 1,000
Topic B extends students use of counting sequences and understanding of tens and ones to numbers up to
and including 120.
In Lesson 3, students apply their understanding of tens and ones to two-digit numbers greater than 40.
Students count by tens and then extra ones to efficiently count large groups of objects. They then use the
place value chart to record quantities as tens and ones as well as by their traditional number (1.NBT.2).
In Lesson 4, students connect this understanding with its application to addition sentences. Students
recognize that numbers such as 67 can be interpreted as 6 tens 7 ones and that the units can be combined to
find the total: 60 + 7 = 67. This work of decomposing and composing 67 into its tens and ones supports the
work students do in Topic C, as they decompose two-digit numbers before adding to another two-digit
number.
Students continue to consider tens and ones in Lesson 5 when they identify 10 more, 10 less, 1 more, and
1 less than any two-digit number (1.NT.5). This work helps students attend to the parts within a two-digit
number, a skill that is critical to adding two-digit numbers within 100. Students recognize that when looking
at a number such as 37, they focus on the tens place when adding or subtracting 10 and on the ones place
when adding or subtracting 1. Students also explore numbers such as 89, where adding 1 more creates
another ten.
Topic B: Numbers to 120

41

NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Topic B 16
During Lesson 6, students practice comparing numbers using the symbols >, =, and < (1.NBT.3). They
compare numbers such as 65 and 75, as well as numbers in various unit form combinations such as 7 tens
5 ones, 5 ones 7 tens, and 6 tens 15 ones. Through these explorations, students consider ways that each
number can be decomposed and recomposed.
In Lesson 7, students work with the counting sequence to 120 (1.NBT.1). After counting from 78 to 120,
students use Hide Zero cards to build numbers from 100 to 120. Their strong familiarity with counting from
0 to 20 and back is then related to the sequence from 100 to 120, helping students recognize that their prior
knowledge can help them succeed at this new level.
Lesson 8 continues the use of the Hide Zero cards, as students use 5-group cards of 10 to write numbers
within place value charts. Students represent 100 as 10 tens and then represent 101 as 10 tens and 1 one.
This work with the unit form of numbers to 120 supports students understanding of the written numerals
101 through 109, which are the most challenging to write (1.NBT.1).
Following students work with the unit form of numbers to 120, students then represent a number of objects
in Lesson 9, presented concretely and pictorially, with the written numeral (1.NBT.1).
A Teaching Sequence Toward Mastery of Numbers to 120

Objective 1: Use the place value chart to record and name tens and ones within a two-digit number up
to 100.
(Lesson 3)
Objective 2: Write and interpret two-digit numbers to 100 as addition sentences that combine tens and
ones.
(Lesson 4)
Objective 3: Identify 10 more, 10 less, 1 more, and 1 less than a two-digit number within 100.
(Lesson 5)
Objective 4: Use the symbols >, =, and < to compare quantities and numerals to 100.
(Lesson 6)
Objective 5: Count and write numbers to 120. Use Hide Zero cards to relate numbers 0 to 20 to 100 to
120.
(Lesson 7)
Objective 6: Count to 120 in unit form using only tens and ones. Represent numbers to 120 as tens and
ones on the place value chart.
(Lesson 8)
Objective 7: Represent up to 120 objects with a written numeral.

(Lesson 9)
Topic B: Numbers to 120

42

Lesson 3
Objective: Use the place value chart to record and name tens and ones
within a two-digit number up to 100.

Application Problem (5 minutes)
Tamra has 4 more goldfish than Peter. Peter has 10 goldfish. How many
goldfish does Tamra have?
Note: Throughout Module 6, the Application Problem comes before the
Fluency Practice so that the core fluency can move directly into the
operations with two-digit numbers. Todays Application Problem
continues students practice with the compare with bigger unknown
problem type, which was part of Lesson 2s objective.
Grade 1 Core Fluency Sprint 1.OA.6 (10 minutes)

Subtraction with Cards 1.OA.6 (5 minutes)
Grade 1 Core Fluency Sprint (10 minutes)

Materials: (S) Core Fluency Sprints
Note: Choose an appropriate Sprint based on the needs of the class. For todays movement-counting
between Sprints A and B, consider practicing counting the Say Ten way to prepare students for todays lesson.
Follow the suggested counting pattern: Count by ones from 37 to 52 and back, and then count by tens from
87 to 107 and back.
Lesson 3: Use the place value chart to record and name tens and ones within a
two-digit number up to 100. 43

Core Fluency Sprint List:

Core Addition Sprint 1 (targeting core addition and
missing addends) NOTES ON
Core Addition Sprint 2 (targeting the most challenging MULTIPLE MEANS
addition within 10 and beyond 10) OF REPRESENTATION:
Core Subtraction Sprint (targeting core subtraction) Differentiating Sprints for students
Core Fluency Sprint: Totals of 5, 6, and 7 (developing helps meet the needs of the class.
understanding of the relationship between addition Adjust them to suit specific learning
and subtraction) needs so students feel successful and
do not show frustration while
Core Fluency Sprint: Totals of 8, 9, and 10 (developing
completing them.
understanding of the relationship between addition
and subtraction)
Subtraction with Cards (5 minutes)

Materials: Fluency Template)
Note: This review activity strengthens students ability to subtract within 10, which supports their work
decomposing numbers in future lessons within the module.
Students combine their digit cards and place them facedown between them.
Each partner flips over two cards and subtracts the smaller number from the larger one.
The partner with the smallest difference keeps the cards played by both players in that round.
If the differences are equal, the cards are set aside, and the winner of the next round keeps the cards
from both rounds.
A player wins by having the most cards when the time is up.
Materials: (T) Hide Zero cards (Template 1), chart paper (S) 4 ten-sticks from personal math toolkit, personal
white board, place value chart (Template 2)
Students sit at their desks with their materials.

T: (Show 47 using Hide Zero cards.) What number am I showing?
S: 47.
T: When I pull apart these Hide Zero cards, 47 will be in two parts. What will they be?
S: 40 and 7.
T: (Write 40 and 7 on the board.) Youre right! Explain to your partner why we dont see 40 but just
the digit 4. (Listen as partners explain their thinking to each other.)
S: When you pull apart the cards, youll see the 0 hiding behind 7. 4 stands for 40 because its in the
tens place. 7 stands for just 7 ones.

T: (Pull apart 47 into 40 and 7.) You are right! Show me 47 using quick ten drawings. Count out each
ten, and add on each of the ones the Say Ten way as you draw them.
S: 1 ten, 2 tens, 3 tens, 4 tens, 4 tens 1, 4 tens 2, , 4 tens 7.
T: How many tens did you draw?
S: 4 tens.
NOTES ON
T: How many ones did you draw?
MULTIPLE MEANS
S: 7 ones. OF ENGAGEMENT:
T: Lets fill in the place value chart. How many tens are in Provide challenging extensions for
47? students. Give clues with tens and
S: 4 tens. ones, and have students guess the
number. For example, What number
T: Lets write 4 in the?
is made up of ?
S: Tens place. (Fill in 4.)
2 tens and 23 ones, 6 tens and 35 ones,
T: How many ones are in 47? 1 ten and 47 ones, 9 tens and 14 ones,
S: 7 ones. etc.
T: Lets write 7 in the?

S: Ones place. (Fill in 7.)
Repeat the process with the following suggested sequence: 57, 67, 86, 68, 95, and 100.
T: (Write 64 on the place value chart.) What does the digit 6 stand for?
S: 6 tens.
T: 6 tens is the same as?
MP.4
S: 60.
T: What does the digit 4 stand for?
S: 4 ones.
T: What is 6 tens and 4 ones, or 60 and 4?
S: 64.
Repeat the process using the following sequence: 74, 84,
93, 73, 65, 56, 79, 97, and 100.

Problem Set within the allotted 10 minutes. For some
classes, it may be appropriate to modify the assignment by
specifying which problems they work on first. Some
problems do not specify a method for solving. Students
should solve these problems using the RDW approach
used for Application Problems.

Lesson Objective: Use the place value chart to record and name tens and ones within a two-digit number up
to 100.
The Student Debrief is intended to invite reflection and active processing of the total lesson experience.
Invite students to review their solutions for the Problem Set. They should check work by comparing answers
with a partner before going over answers as a class. Look for misconceptions or misunderstandings that can
be addressed in the Debrief. Guide students in a conversation to debrief the Problem Set and process the
lesson.
Look at your answers for Problems 1 and 7.
What is the difference between these two
numbers? Explain how you know.
For Problem 3, a student said there are 87
cubes. Is he correct? How can you help this
student so he understands place value
correctly?
Using a quick ten drawing or your Hide Zero
cards, explain how you solved Problem 9(j).
Look at Problem 9(b). What must we add to 46 to
get 5 tens and 0 ones?
Think about the movement-counting we did
between our two Sprints today. How can
counting the Say Ten way help you think about
the tens and ones in two-digit numbers? Use an
example as you share your explanation.
Look at your Application Problem. How did you
solve the problem? Which problem from
yesterday is this problem most like?


NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Lesson 3 Core Addition Sprint 1 16
Number Correct:
A
Name Date
*Write the unknown number. Pay attention to the symbols.
1. 4 + 1 = ____ 16. 4 + 3 = ____
2. 4 + 2 = ____ 17. ____ + 4 = 7
3. 4 + 3 = ____ 18. 7= +4
4. 6 + 1 = ____ 19. 5 + 4 = ____
5. 6 + 2 = ____ 20. ____ + 5 = 9
6. 6 + 3 = ____ 21. 9= +4
7. 1 + 5 = ____ 22. 2 + 7 = ____
8. 2 + 5 = ____ 23. ____ + 2 = 9
9. 3 + 5 = ____ 24. 9= +7
10. 5+ =8 25. 3 + 6 = ____
11. 8 = 3 + ____ 26. ____ + 3 = 9
12. 7 + 2 = ____ 27. 9= +6
13. 7 + 3 = ____ 28. 4+4= +2
14. 7+ = 10 29. 5+4= +3
15. ____ + 7 = 10 30. ____ + 7 = 3 + 6

Number Correct:
B
Name Date
1. 5 + 1 = ____ 16. 2 + 4 = ____
2. 5 + 2 = ____ 17. ____ + 4 = 6
3. 5 + 3 = ____ 18. 6= +4
4. 4 + 1 = ____ 19. 3 + 4 = ____
5. 4 + 2 = ____ 20. ____ + 3 = 7
6. 4 + 3 = ____ 21. 7= +4
7. 1 + 3 = ____ 22. 4 + 5 = ____
8. 2 + 3 = ____ 23. ____ + 4 = 9
9. 3 + 3 = ____ 24. 9= +5
10. 3+ =6 25. 2 + 6 = ____
11. ____+ 3 = 6 26. ____ + 6 = 9
12. 5 + 2 = ____ 27. 9= +2
13. 5 + 3 = ____ 28. 3+3= +4
14. 5+ =8 29. 3+4= +5
15. ____ + 3 = 8 30. ____ + 6 = 2 + 7

Number Correct:
A
Name Date
*Write the unknown number. Pay attention to the equal sign.
1. 5 + 2 = ____ 16. ____ = 5 + 4
2. 6 + 2 = ____ 17. ____ = 4 + 5
3. 7 + 2 = ____ 18. 6 + 3 = ____
4. 4 + 3 = ____ 19. 3 + 6 = ____
5. 5 + 3 = ____ 20. ____ = 2 + 6
6. 6 + 3 = ____ 21. 2 + 7 = ____
7. ____ = 6 + 2 22. ____ = 3 + 4
8. ____ = 2 + 6 23. 3 + 6 = ____
9. ____ = 7 + 2 24. ____ = 4 + 5
10. ____ = 2 + 7 25. 3 + 4 = ____
11. ____ = 4 + 3 26. 13 + 4 = ____
12. ____ = 3 + 4 27. 3 + 14 = ____
13. ____ = 5 + 3 28. 3 + 6 = ____
14. ____ = 3 + 5 29. 13 + = 19
15. ____ = 3 + 4 30. 19 = + 16

Number Correct:
B
Name Date
*Write the unknown number. Pay attention to the equal sign.
1. 4 + 3 = ____ 16. ____ = 6 + 3
2. 5 + 3 = ____ 17. ____ = 3 + 6
3. 6 + 3 = ____ 18. 5 + 4 = ____
4. 6 + 2 = ____ 19. 4 + 5 = ____
5. 7 + 2 = ____ 20. ____ = 2 + 7
6. 5 + 4 = ____ 21. 2 + 6 = ____
7. ____ = 4 + 3 22. ____ = 3 + 4
8. ____ = 3 + 4 23. 4 + 5 = ____
9. ____ = 5 + 3 24. ____ = 3 + 6
10. ____ = 3 + 5 25. 2 + 7 = ____
11. ____ = 6 + 2 26. 12 + 7 = ____
12. ____ = 2 + 6 27. 2 + 17 = ____
13. ____ = 7 + 2 28. 4 + 5 = ____
14. ____ = 2 + 7 29. 14 + = 19
15. ____ = 7 + 2 30. 19 = + 15

NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Lesson 3 Core Subtraction Sprint 16
Number Correct:
A
Name Date
1. 6 1 = ____ 16. 8 2 = ____
2. 6 2 = ____ 17. 8 6 = ____
3. 6 3 = ____ 18. 7 3 = ____
4. 10 1 = ____ 19. 7 4 = ____
5. 10 2 = ____ 20. 8 4 = ____
6. 10 3 = ____ 21. 9 4 = ____
7. 7 2 = ____ 22. 9 5 = ____
8. 8 2 = ____ 23. 9 6 = ____
9. 9 2 = ____ 24. 9 =6
10. 7 3 = ____ 25. 9 =2
11. 8 3 = ____ 26. 2 = 8 ____
12. 10 3 = ____ 27. 2 = 9 ____
13. 10 4 = ____ 28. 10 7 = 9 - ____
14. 9 4 = ____ 29. 95= 3
15. 8 4 = ____ 30. ____ 6 = 9 7

NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Lesson 3 Core Subtraction Sprint 16
Number Correct:
B
Name Date
1. 5 1 = ____ 16. 6 2 = ____
2. 5 2 = ____ 17. 6 4 = ____
3. 5 3 = ____ 18. 8 3 = ____
4. 10 1 = ____ 19. 8 5 = ____
5. 10 2 = ____ 20. 8 6 = ____
6. 10 3 = ____ 21. 9 3 = ____
7. 6 2 = ____ 22. 9 6 = ____
8. 7 2 = ____ 23. 9 7 = ____
9. 8 2 = ____ 24. 9 =5
10. 6 3 = ____ 25. 9 =4
11. 7 3 = ____ 26. 4 = 8 ____
12. 8 3 = ____ 27. 4 = 9 ____
13. 5 4 = ____ 28. 10 8 = 9 ____
14. 6 4 = ____ 29. 86= 7
15. 7 4 = ____ 30. ____ 4 = 9 6

NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Core Fluency Sprint: Totals of 5, 6, & 7 16
Number Correct:
A
Name Date
1. 2 + 3 = ____ 16. 3 + 3 = ____
2. 3+ =5 17. 6 3 = ____
3. 5 3 = ____ 18. 6= +3
4. 5 2 = ____ 19. 2 + 5 = ____
5. ____ + 2 = 5 20. 5+ =7
6. 1 + 5 = ____ 21. 7 2 = ____
7. 1+ =6 22. 7 5 = ____
8. 6 1 = ____ 23. 7= +5
9. 6 5 = ____ 24. 3 + 4 = ____
10. ____ + 5 = 6 25. 4+ =7
11. 4 + 2 = ____ 26. 7 4 = ____
12. 2+ =6 27. 7= +3
13. 6 2 = ____ 28. 3 = 7 ____
14. 6 4 = ____ 29. 75= 4
15. ____ + 4 = 6 30. ____ 3 = 7 4

NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Core Fluency Sprint: Totals of 5, 6, & 7 16
Number Correct:
B
Name Date
1. 1 + 4 = ____ 16. 3 + 3 = ____
2. 4+ =5 17. 6 3 = ____
3. 5 4 = ____ 18. 6= +3
4. 5 1 = ____ 19. 2 + 4 = ____
5. ____ + 1 = 5 20. 4+ =6
6. 7 + 2 = ____ 21. 6 2 = ____
7. 5+ =7 22. 6 4 = ____
8. 7 2 = ____ 23. 6= +4
9. 7 5 = ____ 24. 3 + 4 = ____
10. ____ + 2 = 7 25. 4+ =7
11. 1 + 5 = ____ 26. 7 4 = ____
12. 1+ =6 27. 7= +4
13. 6 1 = ____ 28. 4 = 7 ____
14. 6 5 = ____ 29. 64= -5
15. ____ + 5 = 6 30. ____ 4 = 7 3

NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Core Fluency Sprint: Totals of 8, 9, & 10 1 6
Number Correct:
A
Name Date
1. 5 + 5 = ____ 16. 2 + 6 = ____
2. 5+ = 10 17. 8 = 6 + ____
3. 10 5 = ____ 18. 8 2 = ____
4. 9 + 1 = ____ 19. 2 + 7 = ____
5. 1+ = 10 20. 9 = 7 + ____
6. 10 1 = ____ 21. 9 7 = ____
7. 10 9 = ____ 22. 8= +2
8. ____ + 9 = 10 23. 8 6 = ____
9. 1 + 8 = ____ 24. 3 + 6 = ____
10. 8+ =9 25. 9 = 6 + ____
11. 9 1 = ____ 26. 9 6 = ____
12. 9 8 = ____ 27. 9= +3
13. ____ + 1 = 9 28. 3 = 9 ____
14. 4 + 4 = ____ 29. 95= 6
15. 8 4 = ____ 30. ____ 7 = 8 6

NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Core Fluency Sprint: Totals of 8, 9, & 10 1 6
Number Correct:
B
Name Date
1. 9 + 1 = ____ 16. 3 + 5 = ____
2. 1+ = 10 17. 8 = 5 + ____
3. 10 1 = ____ 18. 8 3 = ____
4. 10 9 = ____ 19. 2 + 6 = ____
5. ____ + 9 = 10 20. 8 = 6 + ____
6. 1 + 7 = ____ 21. 8 6 = ____
7. 7+ =8 22. 2 + 7 = ____
8. 8 1 = ____ 23. 9= +2
9. 8 7 = ____ 24. 9 7 = ____
10. ____ + 1 = 8 25. 4 + 5 = ____
11. 2 + 8 = ____ 26. 9 = 5 + ____
12. 2+ = 10 27. 9 5 = ____
13. 10 2 = ____ 28. 5 = 9 ____
14. 10 8 = ____ 29. 96= 5
15. ____ + 8 = 10 30. ____ 6 = 9 7

Name Date
Write the tens and ones. Complete the statement.
1. 2.
43 = tens ones = tens ones
3. 4.
There are cubes. There are cubes.
5. 6.
7. 8.
There are peanuts. There are juice boxes.

9. Write the number as tens and ones in the place value chart, or use the place value
chart to write the number.
tens ones tens ones
a. 40 b. 46
tens ones tens ones

c. d.
5 9 9 5
tens ones tens ones
e. 75 f. 70
tens ones tens ones

g. 60 h.
8 0
tens ones tens ones

i. j.
5 5 10 0

Name Date
1. Write the tens and ones. Complete the statement.
There are markers.
tens ones tens ones
8 7
a. 90 b.

Name Date
Write the tens and ones. Complete the statement.
1. 2.
52 = tens ones = tens ones
3. 4.
5. 6.
7. 8.
There are carrots. There are markers.

tens ones tens ones
a. 70 b. 76
tens ones tens ones

c. d.
4 9 9 4
tens ones tens ones
e. 65 f. 60
tens ones tens ones

g. 90 h.
10 0
tens ones tens ones

i. j.
8 3 8 0

NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Lesson 3 Fluency Template 16
0 1 2 3
4 5 6 7
8 9 10 5
= + +
numeral cards

NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Lesson 3 Template 1 16
1 0 2 0
3 0 4 0
5 0 6 0
7 0 8 0
Hide Zero cards, numeral side. Copy double-sided, and replace the cards from Module 4.

Hide Zero cards, quick tens side. Copy double-sided, and replace the cards from Module 4.

9 0
1 0 0
Hide Zero cards, numeral side. Copy double-sided, and replace the cards from Module 4.

Hide Zero cards, quick tens side. Copy double-sided, and replace the cards from Module 4.

place value chart

Lesson 4
Objective: Write and interpret two-digit numbers to 100 as addition
sentences that combine tens and ones.

Tamra has 14 goldfish. Darnel has 8 goldfish. How many fewer goldfish does
Darnel have than Tamra?
Note: Todays Application Problem presents a compare with difference
unknown problem type. Continue to ask students the following questions:
Can you draw something?
What can you draw?
What does your drawing show you that can help answer the question?

Digit Detective 1.NBT.2 (4 minutes)
Tens and Ones 1.NBT.4 (3 minutes)
Lesson 4: Write and interpret two-digit numbers to 100 as addition sentences

that combine tens and ones. 68


Materials: (S) Core Fluency Sprints (Lesson 3)
Note: Based on the needs of the class, select a Sprint from yesterdays materials. There are several possible
options available.
1. Re-administer the Sprint from the day before.
2. Administer the next Sprint in the sequence.
3. Differentiate. Administer two different Sprints. Simply have one group do a counting activity on
the back of the Sprint while the other Sprint is corrected.
Hopefully, the daily Sprints and Practice Sets are helping students to make good progress toward mastering
the required Core Fluency for Grade 1. Support students who regularly finish fewer than half of the problems
on a Sprint. Take note of the problem types that slow them down. Perhaps send the next days Sprint home
with them the night prior to administration. Awareness of a students weak spots facilitates targeted support
from within the learning community. For example, a volunteer can be charged with helping a certain student
gain fluency with subtracting 3 from numbers within 10.
Digit Detective (4 minutes)

Materials: (T/S) Personal white board
Note: This activity reviews place value for two-digit numbers to 100, which was introduced in the previous
lesson. Allow students to use their personal white boards to record the mystery numbers as needed.
Write a number on your personal white board, but do not show students.
T: The digit in the tens place is 2. The digit in the ones place is 1. Whats my number?
S: 21.
T: Whats the value of the 2? (Pause, and then snap.)
S: 20.
T: Whats the value of the 1? (Pause, and then snap.)
S: 1.
T: (Reveal the number.)
Repeat with the following suggested sequence: 12, 45, 54, 63, 87, 78, and 92. Alternate saying the number in
the ones place first and saying the number in the tens place first. For the last minute, challenge students with
adding or subtracting clues for mystery numbers between 40 and 99 as in the examples below.
T: The digit in the tens place is 1 more than 3. (Pause.) The digit in the ones place is 10 less than 12.
Say the number the Say Ten way.
S: 4 tens 2.
T: The digit in the ones place is equal to 5 + 3. The digit in the tens place is equal to 10 5. Say the
number the Say Ten way.
S: 5 tens 8.
T: (Reveal the number.)


Tens and Ones (3 minutes)

Materials: (T) Rekenrek
Note: Reviewing this Module 4 fluency activity prepares students for todays lesson.
Practice decomposing numbers into tens and ones using the Rekenrek.
T: (Show 16 on the Rekenrek.) How many tens do you see?
S: 1.
T: How many ones?
S: 6.
T: Say the number the Say Ten way.
S: Ten 6.
T: 1 ten plus 6 ones is ?
S: 16.
Slide over the next row, and repeat the process for 26 and 36. Continue with the following suggested
sequence within 40: 15, 25, 35, 17, 27, 37, 19, 29, and 39.
Materials: (T) Chart paper with a place value chart, Hide Zero cards (Lesson 3 Template 1) (S) Personal white
board, place value chart (Lesson 3 Template 2), numeral cards (Lesson 3 Fluency Template)
Gather students in the meeting area in a semicircle formation with their personal white boards.
T: (Show 78 with Hide Zero cards.) When I pull apart these Hide Zero cards, what two numbers will you
see?
S: 70 and 8.
T: (Pull apart the Hide Zero cards.) How many tens are in 70? Record the tens in your place value
chart.
S: 7 tens. (Write 7 in the tens place.)
T: How many ones are here? (Show the 8 card.) Fill in the rest of your
place value chart.
S: 8 ones. (Write 8 in the ones place.)
T: Say this number as tens and ones.
S: 7 tens 8 ones.
T: 7 tens and 8 ones is the same as ?
S: 78.
T: On your personal white board, make a number bond that shows the
tens and the ones.
S: (Break apart 78 into 70 and 8.)


T: (Record the number bond on the chart.) Write as many addition sentences as you can that use your
number bond.
Circulate and ensure that students are only using the three numbers from this bond: 78, 70, and 8. If
students begin writing subtraction sentences, remind them of the directions. The teacher may choose to
challenge some students to consider subtraction sentences, but these sentences are not addressed during the
course of the lesson.
T: Give me a number sentence that matches this number bond. Start with the part that represents the
tens. (Record on the chart as students answer.)
S: 70 + 8 = 78.
T: Start your number sentence with the ones. (Record on
the chart.) NOTES ON
MULTIPLE MEANS
S: 8 + 70 = 78.
OF EXPRESSION:
T: 78 is the same as?
Students may need additional support
S: 70 plus 8. (Write 78 = 70 + 8 as students answer.) with the language of ___ is the same
T: This time, start with the ones. 78 is the same as? as ___, ___ is ___ more than ___,
S: 8 plus 70. (Write 78 = 8 + 70 as students answer.) etc. Insert a sentence frame into the
personal white board, and allow the
T: Talk to your partner. What do you notice about the student to fill in the blanks. Pointing to
addends in all of these number sentences? each word and number as it is read can
S: 70 is a bigger number than 8. They always say how provide a bridge between the concrete
many tens and ones make up the total. You can and the abstract.
switch the addends around, and the total is still the
same.
T: Lets make some more than statements. 8 more than
70 is? Say the whole sentence.
NOTES ON
S: 8 more than 70 is 78. (Record on the chart.) MULTIPLE MEANS
T: 70 more than 8 is? Say the whole sentence. OF ENGAGEMENT:
S: 70 more than 8 is 78. (Record on the chart.) When playing games with students,
modeling how the game is played is
Repeat the process following the suggested sequence: 54, 62,
very important. Oral instructions alone
75, 57, 83, 91, and 100. Use different language to elicit a variety
do not help everyone in the class
of answers for each number. For example, 54 is the same understand how the game is played.
as , 50 plus 4 is , 5 tens and 4 ones is , 4 more Have two students demonstrate
than 50 is , and 50 more than 4 is . Partner A and Partner B roles so that all
For the remainder of time, have partners play Combine Tens students see and hear the way the
game is played.
and Ones. Leave the chart for 78 up on the board as a
reference to support students.
Prepare two decks of numeral cards 0 through 9 for each pair.
Pick a card from the first deck. This number is placed in the tens place on the place value chart.
For example, 7 is drawn and placed in the tens place.


Pick a card from the second deck. This number is placed in the
ones place on the place value chart.
For example, 5 is drawn and placed in the ones place.
Partners A and B make a number bond decomposing the
number into tens and ones.
Partner A writes two addition number sentences, such as those
in the image from the previous page.
Partner B writes a more than statement that combines tens
and ones, such as those in the image on the previous page.
Switch roles for the next pair of cards drawn.

Students should do their personal best to complete the Problem Set within the allotted 10 minutes. For
some classes, it may be appropriate to modify the assignment by specifying which problems they work on
first. Some problems do not specify a method for solving. Students should solve these problems using the
RDW approach used for Application Problems.
Lesson Objective: Write and interpret two-digit numbers

to 100 as addition sentences that combine tens and ones.
Set. They should check work by comparing answers with
a partner before going over answers as a class. Look for
addressed in the Debrief. Guide students in a
conversation to debrief the Problem Set and process the
lesson.
For Problems 3 and 4, even though the totals use
the same digits, the value of each answer is
different. Explain why this is so.
Look at Problem 10. How many tens make up
100? How can you express 100 as all ones?
Look at Problem 1. If we unbundled one of the
tens, how many tens and ones will we have?


Look at Problems 3, 4, and 5. What do you think

are in the baskets? In the bottles? In the bags?
What makes you think this?
How did todays fluency activities connect with
todays lesson?
How did you solve the Application Problem?
What other problems did this one remind you of?



Name Date
Count the objects, and fill in the number bond or place value chart. Complete the
sentences to add the tens and ones.
1. 2.
40 and 3 make . 40 and 6 make .
40 + 3 = 40 + 6 =
3. 4.
57 = + 75 = ____ + ____
7 more than 50 is . 5 more than 70 is .

5. 6.
+ = + =
tens + ones = tens + ones =


7. 8.
+ = + =

9. 10.
+ = + =
11. Complete the sentences to add the tens and ones.
a. 50 + 6 = b. + 9 = 89
c. 5 tens + ones = 56 d. 9 ones + 8 tens =


Name Date
1. Count the objects, and fill in the number bond or place value chart. Complete the
+ =
tens + ones =
a. 90 + 2 = b. 7 tens + ones = 79


Name Date
Count the objects, and fill in the number bond or place value chart. Complete the
1. 2.
70 and 6 make ____. 40 and 5 make ____.
70 + 6 = ____ 40 + 5 = ____
3. 4.
69 = ____ + ____ 97 = ____ + ____
9 more than 60 is ____. 7 more than 90 is ____.
5. 6.
+ = + =


7. 8.
+ = + =

9. 10.
+ =
+ =
tens + ones =
tens + ones =
a. 80 + 6 = b. + 7 = 57
c. 9 tens + ones = 95 d. 4 ones + 8 tens =


Lesson 5
Objective: Identify 10 more, 10 less, 1 more, and 1 less than a two-digit
number within 100.

Kiana has 6 fewer goldfish than Tamra. Tamra has 14 goldfish.

How many goldfish does Kiana have?
Note: Todays Application Problem is the last in a series of three
problems that use a related context. The three problems can be
discussed together during the Student Debrief. As students share
strategies and compare and contrast the problem stories, they gain a
stronger sense of each particular problem type.

Subtraction with Cards 1.OA.6 (5 minutes)
Coin Drop 1.NBT.5, 1.MD.3 (3 minutes)

Note: Give the appropriate Practice Set to each student. Students who completed all of the questions on
their most recent Practice Set correctly should be given the next level of difficulty. All other students should
try to improve their scores on their current levels.
Have students complete as many problems as they can in 90 seconds. Assign a counting pattern and start
number for early finishers, or have them practice make ten addition or subtraction on the back of their
papers. Collect and correct any Practice Sets completed within the allotted time.
Lesson 5: Identify 10 more, 10 less, 1 more, and 1 less than a two-digit number
within 100. 79

Subtraction with Cards (5 minutes)

Materials: (Lesson 3 Fluency Template)
Note: This review activity targets the core subtraction fluency for Grade 1. As students play, closely monitor
any students who have not performed well on the core Practice Sets and Sprints to see if they are able to be
successful in this untimed, interactive game. Take advantage of any opportunity to highlight improvement.
Students combine their digit cards and place them facedown between them.
If the differences are equal, the cards are set aside, and the winner of the next round keeps the cards
from both rounds.
A player wins by having the most cards when the time is up.
Coin Drop (3 minutes)

Materials: (T) 4 dimes, 10 pennies, can NOTES ON
MULTIPLE MEANS
Note: In this activity, students practice adding and subtracting OF ENGAGEMENT:
ones and tens within 40. This skill is expanded to numbers
After playing Coin Drop with pennies
within 100 in todays lesson.
and then dimes, mix pennies and
T: (Hold up a penny.) Name my coin. dimes so that students have to add
based on the changing value of the
S: A penny.
coin. Alternate between naming the
T: How much is it worth? coin and the value before dropping the
S: 1 cent. coins. This challenges students and
keeps them listening for what comes
T: Listen carefully as I drop coins in my can. Count along
next.
in your minds.
Drop in some pennies, and ask how much money is in the can. Take out some pennies, and show them.
Ask how much money is still in the can. Continue adding and subtracting pennies for a minute or so.
Then, repeat the activity with dimes.
Materials: (T) 2 pieces of chart paper with two pairs of place value charts as shown (S) Personal white
board, place value chart (Lesson 3 Template 2)
Have students sit at their desks with all materials.

T: Draw 62 using a quick ten drawing.
S: (Draw 6 quick tens and 2 circles.)
T: According to your picture, how many tens and ones are in 62?
S: 6 tens and 2 ones.
within 100. 80

T: (Write 62 on the double place value chart template.)

T: Show me 1 more than 62.
S: (Draw 1 more circle.)
T: What is 1 more than 62? Say the whole sentence.
S: 1 more than 62 is 63. (Write 63 on the second place value chart.)
T: From 62 to 63, we added 1 more. (Draw an arrow
from the first place value chart to the second, and
write + 1 above the arrow.) NOTES ON
T: Look at the place value chart. Turn and explain to your MULTIPLE MEANS
partner about what did and did not change. OF ENGAGEMENT:
S: The tens didnt change. They both stayed as 6 tens Some students may not be able to
because we only added 1 more. The ones changed imagine adding or subtracting a ten at
from 2 to 3 because we added 1 more. 3 is 1 more this point. Support these students with
all of the materials used in the lesson,
than 2. To figure out 1 more, I just have to add 1
and give them plenty of practice. Their
more to the ones place! (Note: In Problem 3 of the
path to abstract thinking may be a little
Problem Set, when dealing with 1 more than 89, the longer than that of other students.
common misconception voiced by the last student is
used as a talking point in the Debrief.)
T: Show me 62 with your drawing again.
S: (Show 62.)
T: (Write 62 on a new place value chart.) How can you show
10 more than 62? (Draw an arrow, and write + 10 above it.)
Turn and talk to your partner.
S: Just draw 1 more quick ten!
T: Do that.
T: What is 10 more than 62? Say the whole sentence.
S: 10 more than 62 is 72.
NOTES ON
T: (Write 72 into the second place value chart.) Talk to MULTIPLE MEANS
your partner about what changes and what stays the
OF ENGAGEMENT:
same.
Other students in the class may be able
S: The tens changed this time from 6 tens to 7 tens to visualize adding and subtracting
MP.4 because we added 10 more. The ones did nt ones and tens. Since these students
change because we just added 1 ten. We could add have moved from concrete to abstract
10 extra circles, but once you get 10, we make them thinking, challenge them by giving
into a quick ten, so why bother? We can add a ten problems adding or subtracting 2 ones
quickly. I just have to add 1 ten to the tens! or tens or 3 ones or tens.
T: We added 10 more to 62 and now have 72.

Repeat the process using 1 less and 10 less with 87 as
shown.
within 100. 81

Then, follow the suggested sequence:

1 less/10 less than 77
1 more/1 less than 90

classes, it may be appropriate to modify the assignment
by specifying which problems they work on first. Some
Lesson Objective: Identify 10 more, 10 less, 1 more,

and 1 less than a two-digit number within 100.
the lesson.
I say, When I find 1 more, only the ones digit
changes. Im wrong! Which problem shows that
Im wrong? When am I correct?
I say, When I find 1 less, only the ones digit
changes. Im wrong! Which problem shows that
Im wrong again?
How can you use the place value chart to help
you count by ones? By tens?
How did our fluency activity of Coin Drop relate
to todays lesson?
within 100. 82

Look at your Application Problem. How is it similar, and how is it different from other Application
Problems you have solved? Share your strategy for beginning to solve the problem.

within 100. 83

Name Date
1. Solve. You may draw or cross off (x) to show your work.
a. b.
1 more than 68 is . 10 more than 68 is .
c. d.
10 less than 71 is . 1 less than 70 is .
2. Find the mystery numbers. Use the arrow way to explain how you know.
a. 10 more than 59 is . b. 1 less than 59 is .
+ 1 ten
5 9
c. 1 more than 59 is . d. 10 less than 59 is .
within 100. 84

3. Write the number that is 1 more. 4. Write the number that is 10 more.
a. 10, a. 10,
b. 70, b. 60,
c. 76, c. 61,
d. 79, d. 78,
e. 99, e. 90,
5. Write the number that is 1 less. 6. Write the number that is 10 less.
a. 12, a. 20,
b. 52, b. 60,
c. 51, c. 74,
d. 80, d. 81,
e. 100, e. 100,
7. Fill in the missing numbers in each sequence.
a. 40, 41, 42, b. 89, 88, 87, ____
c. 72, 71, , 69 d. 63, , 65, 66
e. 40, 50, 60, f. 80, 70, 60,
g. 55, 65, , 85 h. 99, 89, , 69
i. , 99, 98, 97 j. , 77, , 57
within 100. 85

Name Date
1. Find the mystery numbers. Use the arrow way to show how you know.
a. 1 less than 69 is _______. b. 10 more than 69 is _______.
a. 40, a. 50,
b. 86, b. 62,
c. 89, c. 90,
a. 75, a. 80,
b. 70, b. 99,
c. 100, c. 100,
within 100. 86

Name Date
1. Solve. You may draw or cross off (x) to show your work.
a. b.
10 more than 79 is _____. 10 less than 81 is _____.
c. d.
1 more than 79 is _____. 1 less than 80 is _____.
2. Find the mystery numbers. You may make a drawing to help solve, if needed.
a. 10 more than 75 is _______. b. 1 more than 75 is _______.
+ 10
7 5
c. 10 less than 88 is _______. d. 1 less than 88 is _______.
within 100. 87

a. 40, a. 60,
b. 50, b. 70,
c. 65, c. 77,
d. 69, d. 89,
e. 99, e. 90,
a. 53, a. 50,
b. 73, b. 60,
c. 71, c. 84,
d. 80, d. 91,
e. 100, e. 100,
7. Fill in the missing numbers in each sequence.
a. 50, 51, 52, ____ b. 79, 78, 77, ____
c. 62, 61, ____, 59 d. 83, ____, 85, 86
e. 60, 70, 80, ____ f. 100, 90, 80, ____
g. 57, 67, ____, 87 h. 89, 79, ____, 59
i. ____, 99, 98, 97 j. ____, 84, ____, 64
within 100. 88

Lesson 6
Objective: Use the symbols >, =, and < to compare quantities and numerals
to 100.

Nikil has 12 toy cars. Willie has 4 toy cars. When Nikil
and Willie play, how many toy cars do they have?
Note: Today, the very simple put together with result
unknown problem type is revisited. Please use this to
highlight that students might use either a double or single
tape to model as is pictured to the right.

True or False Number Sentences 1.OA.6, 1.OA.7 (5 minutes)

NOTES ON
Materials: (S) Core Fluency Practice Sets (Lesson 1) MULTIPLE MEANS
OF ENGAGEMENT:
Note: Give the appropriate Practice Set to each student. Help
For students who are still on Practice
students become aware of their improvement by asking them Set A, a Practice Set (completed aloud)
to quickly stand if they tried a new level or improved their score that is privately administered may help
from the previous day. them be more successful. The pencil
Students complete as many problems as they can in 90 seconds. and paper can hold back some
students who may have trouble with
Assign a counting pattern and start number for early finishers,
their fine motor skills.
Lesson 6: Use the symbols >, =, and < to compare quantities and numerals to
100. 89

or have them practice make ten addition or subtraction on the back of their papers. Collect and correct any
Practice Sets completed within the allotted time.

Materials: (T) 10 dimes, 10 pennies, can
Note: This activity reviews yesterdays lesson, in which students learned to add and subtract ones and tens
within 100.
Today, start with 5 dimes in the can. Drop a penny or a dime into the can, asking students the total after each
drop of one coin. Ask them to say, 1 cent more is 51 cents, or 10 cents more is 60 cents. For today,
perhaps limit it to 1 more and 10 more.
True or False Number Sentences (5 minutes)

Note: This activity provides practice with Grade 1s core fluency, while reviewing the inequality symbols that
were presented in Module 4 Topic B.
Review the symbols =, >, and <. Write true and false number sentences using the symbols. On the signal,
students say whether the number sentence is true or false. Then, choose a student who answered correctly
to prove it.
T (Write 5 = 7.) Is this number sentence true or false? (Pause, and then snap.)
S: False.
T: Why? Student A.
S: 5 is less than 7.
T: (Write 8 = 6 + 2.) True or false? (Pause, and then snap.)
S: True.
T: Why? Student B.
S: 6 + 2 is 8, and 8 is the same as 8.
T: (Write 8 = 8 underneath 8 = 6 + 2.)
Continue with the following suggested sequence. Be sure to space the number sentences so students can
easily see the two expressions, and provide time for students to solve on their personal white boards as
needed. Before completing the > and < columns (see below), write the symbol in the middle of the board,
and review its meaning.
a. 6=82 e. 5>6 i. 8<9
b. 3=85 f. 7>4 j. 6<5
c. 5+1=4+1 g. 8>7 k. 6<3+3
d. 5+1=4+2 h. 6>9 l. 5+2<2+5
100. 90


Materials: (T) Chart paper, comparison cards (Template), tape (S) Personal white board, place value chart
(Lesson 3 Template 2), comparison cards (Template)

T: (On chart paper, write 100 and 50 in the place value charts with room
between them to insert a comparison card.) Which number is greater?
S: 100.
T: How do you know?
S: 50 has 5 tens, and 100 has 10 tens. When you count up, you say 50 a long time before you say
100. 10 tens is 5 tens more than 5 tens. You need to add more to 50 to make 100.
T: (Show < and > cards.) Which symbol should I use?
S: Greater than! The one on the right.
T: (Tape the > symbol between the two place value charts.) What are some of the ways you help
yourself remember that this (point to >) is the greater than symbol?
S: Pretend the open side is a hungry alligators mouth that eats the bigger number. The side with
two endpoints is near the greater number. The side with 1 endpoint is near the smaller one.
T: (Tape the other two symbol cards to the chart paper.) What is the name of this symbol?
S: Less than!
T: This one?
S: Equal to!
T: Choose the symbol you think I should use to compare the two numbers I write. Wait for the snap.
T: (Write 60 and 90. Pause before giving the signal. Add the < symbol between 60 and 90.) Lets read
our math sentence together.
S/T: 60 is less than 90.
Repeat the above process with the following suggested
sequence of numbers: 59 and 52, 80 and 70, 49 and 94, 7 tens
and 6 tens 8 ones, 78 ones and 8 tens, 67 ones and 6 tens, 7 NOTES ON
tens and 6 tens 10 ones, 10 tens and 90, and 8 tens 2 ones and MULTIPLE MEANS
7 tens and 15 ones. OF ENGAGEMENT:
As students work on the sequence of
If students could use more practice, invite them to play numbers, be sure they are reading the
Compare It! with a partner. math sentence out loud once they
Each partner writes a number from 0 to 100 on her choose the symbol to compare the
white board, without showing her partner. numbers. Being able to read the
sentence properly demonstrates they
When both are ready, they show their boards. have mastered the difference between
For the first round, Partner A uses the cards to put the the symbols.
symbol between the boards.
Partner B reads the true number sentence that was made. (Demonstrate with the number sentence
on the board.)
100. 91

At the end of the first round, have partners use Partner

Bs cards. Alternate for each round until the students
have played for four minutes. During that time,
circulate and notice which students are successful and
which students may need more support. Encourage
students to make the game more challenging by varying
how they represent the number, using quick tens, place
value charts, and writing the numbers as tens and ones.

Lesson Objective: Use the symbols >, =, and < to

compare quantities and numerals to 100.
Look at Problem 1(g). How did you solve this
problem? Explain your thinking.
Which problem was the trickiest in the Problem
Set to compare? What made it tricky, and how
did you or your partner solve it? If you were
going to give a friend advice on how to solve
these kinds of tricky comparisons, what would
you suggest to him?
Share a comparison problem that you and your
partner created during the Compare It! activity.
100. 92

With your partner, share how you remember the meaning of each symbol.
How did todays Fluency Practice help you with our lesson? Explain your thinking.
Look at your Application Problem. Share your drawing and your solution. How did your drawing
help you solve the problem? How is your drawing similar to or different from your partners
drawing?

100. 93

NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Lesson 6 Problem Set 1 6
Name Date
1. Use the symbols to compare the numbers. Fill in the blank with <, >, or = to make
the statement true.
85 75 4 tens 3 ones 4 tens 6 ones
85 > 75 43 < 46
85 is greater than 75. 43 is less than 46.
a. b.
35 42 78 80
c. d.
100 99 93 8 tens 3 ones
e. f.
9 tens 8 ones 10 tens 6 tens 2 ones 2 tens 6 ones
g. h.
72 2 ones 7 tens 5 tens 4 ones 4 tens 14 ones
100. 94

2. Circle the correct words to make the sentence true. Use >, <, or = and numbers to
write a true statement.
a. is greater than b. is greater than
29 is less than 2 tens 9 ones 7 tens 9 ones is less than 80
is equal to is equal to
c. d. is greater than
is greater than
10 tens is less than 0 tens 6 tens 1 one is less than 5 tens 16 ones
0 ones 10 ones
3. Use <, =, or > to compare the pairs of numbers.
a. 3 tens 9 ones 5 tens 9 ones

b. 30 13
c. 100 10 tens
d. 6 tens 4 ones 4 ones 6 tens
e. 7 tens 9 ones 79
f. 1 ten 5 ones 5 ones 1 ten
g. 72 6 tens 12 ones
h. 88 8 tens 18 ones
100. 95

NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Lesson 6 Exit Ticket 1 6
Name Date
Circle the correct words to make the sentence true. Use >, <, or = and numbers to write
a true statement.
a. is greater than b. is greater than
36 is less than 6 tens 3 ones 90 is less than 8 tens 9 ones
c. d.
is greater than is greater than
52 is less than 5 tens 2 ones 4 tens 2 ones is less than 3 tens 14 ones
100. 96

NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Lesson 6 Homework 1 6
Name Date
1. Use the symbols to compare the numbers. Fill in the blank with <, >, or = to make
the statement true.
62 57 5 tens 6 ones 5 tens 9 ones
62 > 57 56 < 59
62 is greater than 57. 56 is less than 59.
a. b.
43 35 60 86
c. d.
10 tens 99 5 tens 4 ones 54
e. f.
7 tens 9 ones 9 tens 7 ones 1 ten 3 ones 31
g. h.
3 tens 0 ones 2 tens 10 ones 3 tens 5 ones 2 tens 17 ones
100. 97

2. Fill in the correct words from the box to make the sentence true. Use >, <, or = and
numbers to write a true statement.
is greater than is less than is equal to
a. 42 1 ten 2 ones
b. 6 tens 7 ones _______________________ 5 tens 17 ones
c. 37 __________________________ 73
d. 2 tens 14 ones _____________________ 4 ones 2 tens
e. 9 ones 5 tens __________________________ 9 tens 5 ones
100. 98

> < = <

> < = >
> < = =
> < =
comparison cards, page 1. Print double-sided on cardstock. Distribute each of the three cards to students.
100. 99

less than equal to less than greater than
greater than equal to less than greater than
equal to equal to less than greater than
equal to less than greater than
comparison cards, page 2. Print double-sided on cardstock. Distribute each of the three cards to students.
100. 100

Lesson 7
Objective: Count and write numbers to 120. Use Hide Zero cards to relate
numbers 0 to 20 to 100 to 120.

Shanika has 6 roses and 7 tulips in a vase. Maria has 4 roses and
8 tulips in a vase. Who has more flowers? How many more flowers
does she have?
Note: Todays problem embeds an opportunity for comparison.
Students continue to practice adding across ten, which supports
their work in Topic C.

True or False Number Sentences 1.OA.6, 1.OA.7 (5 minutes)

Note: Choose an appropriate Sprint based on the needs of the class. As students work, pay attention to their
strategies and the number of problems they answer. Today, between Sides A and B of the Sprint, practice
counting the Say Ten way up and down from 67 to 77.
Core Addition Sprint 1 (targeting core addition and missing addends)
Core Addition Sprint 2 (targeting the most challenging addition within 10 and beyond 10)
Core Subtraction Sprint (targeting core subtraction)
numbers 0 to 20 to 100 to 120. 101

Core Fluency Sprint: Totals of 5, 6, and 7 (developing understanding of the relationship between
addition and subtraction)
Core Fluency Sprint: Totals of 8, 9, and 10 (developing understanding of the relationship between
addition and subtraction)
True or False Number Sentences (5 minutes)

Note: This activity reviews Lesson 6.

Review the symbols =, >, and <. Write true and false number sentences using the symbols. Signal, and then
wait for students to say whether the number sentence is true or false. Choose a student who answered
correctly to prove it.
Use the first two columns as the suggested sequence. At each checkpoint, decide whether students are ready
for the next column or if they should continue with similar problem types. The third column is provided as a
possible opportunity for a few students who would really enjoy a challenge.
a. 5 > 4 e. 30 + 5 = 35 i. 9 + 8 = 10 + 7
b. 50 > 40 f. 53 = 5 + 30 j. 15 + 10 = 25 10
c. 45 > 54 g. 73 < 7 tens 3 ones k. 14 7 > 9
d. 15 < 41 h. 94 > 9 ones 3 tens l. 80 < 79 + 1
Checkpoint. Checkpoint.
Materials: (T) Vertical counting sequence (Template), Hide Zero cards (Lesson 3 Template 1) (S) Hide Zero
cards (optional)
Have students sit at their desks at the start of the lesson. If students are using Hide Zero cards, distribute
cards up to 9 tens. Hold students 10 tens card until later in the lesson. The 11 tens and 12 tens cards are not
needed for todays lesson.
T: (Project the vertical counting sequence template, preferably on an interactive board or easel paper.)
This chart shows numbers from 1 through 77. Can you help me write more numbers until we fill up
all of the empty spaces?
S: (Write the numbers on the chart as students count.) 78, 79, 80, 81, 82, , 100.
T: We have more spaces on the chart. Who knows what number comes after 100?
S: One hundred one.
T: Yes. One hundred one (101), one hundred two (102), ... 120. (Be sure to read the number without
saying and between one hundred and the ones place unit.)
T: These last two columns look a little like other columns on the chart. Does anyone see what I see?
S: The first two columns have most of the same digits.
numbers 0 to 20 to 100 to 120. 102

T: Lets look more closely at these columns. (If using an

interactive board, highlight numbers 1 through 20 and NOTES ON
numbers 101 through 120.) Talk with a partner about MULTIPLE MEANS
what you notice. (Circulate and listen as OF ENGAGEMENT:
students discuss.)
Challenge students who seem
S: I notice that there is a 1, 2, 3, 4, ... all the way to 20 at confident with this skill to start at 120
the beginning of this chart and at the end of this chart. and complete their chart by counting
The pattern goes to 100 and starts over again, but back.
you cant forget to include 100 each time as you say
the new numbers. Once you get to 100, the
numbers start over again, only this time you say 100
first. So instead of 1, 2, 3, 4, its 101, 102, 103,
and 104. NOTES ON
T: Lets try this again with Hide Zero cards and see if we MULTIPLE MEANS
can tell whats happening. Im going to give you a new OF ENGAGEMENT:
Hide Zero card. This one has 10 tens. (Distribute 10 If students have trouble completing the
tens card.) Problem Set because they do not know
T: When we get to 100, the next number is? their numbers to 120, give them a
S: 101. vertical counting sequence to
reference as they complete the
T: Point to the ones place on your hundred card. problems.
S: (Students point.)
T: Place one on top of your 100 card in the ones
place. What number did you make?
S: One hundred one!
T: Yes! It looks like a zero sandwich with the ones as the bread. What number is that again?
S One hundred one!
T: Now, lets add another one. 100, 101, ?
S: 102.
MP.4
T: Which card did you need to show 102?
S: Our 100 card and a 2.
Repeat this process until the class reaches 120. Then, as a class, count down either verbally as the teacher
points to the numbers on the chart displayed or as students create the numbers with their Hide Zero cards,
until reaching 88.

Students should do their personal best to complete the Problem Set within the allotted 10 minutes. For
some classes, it may be appropriate to modify the assignment by specifying which problems they work on
first. Some problems do not specify a method for solving. Students should solve these problems using the
RDW approach used for Application Problems.
numbers 0 to 20 to 100 to 120. 103

Lesson Objective: Count and write numbers to 120.

Use Hide Zero cards to relate numbers 0 to 20 to 100 to
120.
the lesson.
Look at Problem 1. What are some patterns you
notice in the chart?
Look at Problem 4. Which sequences were the
quickest for you to solve? Why? Which
sequences were trickier? On your personal white
board, create a really tricky problem for your
partner. What did you do to make it tricky to
solve? What strategies might you use to solve it
correctly?
Share the progress you have made with your
work with Sprints. Tell us about the math
accomplishments you are proud of.
Look at your Application Problem. Share your
strategies for solving the problem.

numbers 0 to 20 to 100 to 120. 104

Name Date
1. Fill in the missing numbers in the chart up to 120.
a. b. c. d. e.
71 81 91 111
82 102
73 83 93 113
84 94 104 114
76 86 96 106 116
77 87 97 117
79 89 99 109 119
80 100 110
numbers 0 to 20 to 100 to 120. 105

2. Write the numbers to continue the counting sequence to 120.
96, 97, , , , , ,
, , , , , ,
, , , , , ,
, , , , ,
3. Circle the sequence that is incorrect. Rewrite it correctly on the line.
a. b.
107, 108, 109, 110, 120 99, 100, 101, 102, 103
_________________________________________________________
4. Fill in the missing numbers in the sequence.
a. b.
115, 116, ____, ____, ____ _____, _____, 118, _____, 120
c. d.
100, 101, ____, ____, 104 97, 98, _____, _____, _____, _____
numbers 0 to 20 to 100 to 120. 106

Name Date
1. Complete the chart by filling in the missing numbers.
a. b. c. d.
88 108
99 119
90
2. Fill in the missing numbers to continue the counting sequence.
a.
b.
117, _____, 119, _____ 108, 109, _____, _____, _____
numbers 0 to 20 to 100 to 120. 107

Name Date
1. Fill in the missing numbers in the chart up to 120.
a. b. c. d. e.
71 91 111
82 102
93
74 114
85 105
96 116
87
108
79 99 119
80 90 110
numbers 0 to 20 to 100 to 120. 108

2. Write the numbers to continue the counting sequence to 120.
99, , 101, _____, _____, _____, _____, _____, _____,

_____, _____, _____, _____, _____, _____, _____,
_____, _____, _____, _____, _____, _____
3. Circle the sequence that is incorrect. Rewrite it correctly on the line.

a. b.
116, 117, 118, 119, 120 96, 97, 98, 99, 100, 110
_________________________________________________________

a. b.
113, 114, _____, _____, _____ _____, _____, _____, 120
c. d.
102, _____, _____, _____ 88, 89, _____, _____, _____, _____,
numbers 0 to 20 to 100 to 120. 109

1 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 81 91 101 111
2 12 22 32 42 52 62 72 82 92 102 112
3 13 23 33 43 53 63 73 83 93 103 113
4 14 24 34 44 54 64 74 84 94 104 114
5 15 25 35 45 55 65 75 85 95 105 115
6 16 26 36 46 56 66 76 86 96 106 116
7 17 27 37 47 57 67 77 87 97 107 117
8 18 28 38 48 58 68 78 88 98 108 118
9 19 29 39 49 59 69 79 89 99 109 119
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
vertical counting sequence
Lesson 7: Count and write numbers to 120. Use Hide Zero cards to relate numbers 0 to 20 to 100 to 120.
110
2015 Great Minds. eureka-math.org This work is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 3.0 Unported License.
G1-M6-TE-1.3.0-06.2015
Lesson 8
Objective: Count to 120 in unit form using only tens and ones. Represent
numbers to 120 as tens and ones on the place value chart.


Lee found 15 sparkly rocks. Kim found 8 sparkly rocks. How many more sparkly rocks did Lee find than Kim?
Note: Todays Application Problem is a compare with difference unknown
problem type. For students who are successful with solving this problem when
the term more is used, consider adjusting the question to ask how many fewer
sparkly rocks Kim found. By asking both questions, the teacher can help
students recognize that the same solution sentence can be used with either
question.

1 More, 1 Less, 10 More, 10 Less 1.OA.5, 1.NBT.5 (4 minutes)

options available.
Re-administer the Sprint from the day before.
Administer the next Sprint in the sequence.
Differentiate. Administer two different Sprints. Simply have one group do a counting activity on the
back of the Sprint while the other Sprint is corrected.
Today, between Sides A and B of the Sprint, practice counting the Say Ten way from 88 to 99 and back.
numbers to 120 as tens and ones on the place value chart. 111

1 More, 1 Less, 10 More, 10 Less (4 minutes)

Materials: (T) Vertical counting sequence (Lesson 7 Template)
NOTES ON
Note: This fluency activity reviews the grade-level standard of
MULTIPLE MEANS
mentally finding 10 more or 10 less than a number without
having to count. OF REPRESENTATION:
Some students may need practice
Display the vertical counting sequence chart for reference. writing the number after they mentally
T: Say the number that is 1 more. 5. (Pause, and then find 1 or 10 more or less. As an
alternative for certain students, have
snap.)
them write the numbers instead of
S: 6. saying them.
T: 15. (Pause, and then snap.)
S: 16.
Continue with the following suggested sequence, as time permits: 55, 75, 105, 115; 67, 97, 107; 9, 49, 99,
109, 119.
Repeat for 10 more: Repeat for 10 less: Repeat for 1 less:
10, 40, 90, 100 20, 50, 70 4, 14, 84
3, 23, 63 45, 65, 95 8, 38, 88
56, 86, 96 88, 118, 108 10, 70, 120
Materials: (T) 100-bead Rekenrek and 20-bead Rekenrek (if available), place value chart
(Lesson 3 Template 2), personal white board, document camera (S) Place value chart
(Lesson 3 Template 2), personal white board
Note: If the 20-bead Rekenrek is not available, draw two rows of large dots (5 white and 5 red in each row)
on chart paper to represent two more rows of beads. Along with the bead sets, put the place value chart in a
personal white board under the document camera, or put an image of the place value chart on an interactive
board.
Gather students in the meeting area for todays lesson.
T: You did a great job with counting the Say Ten way between the two Sprints today. Lets count by
tens the Say Ten way. (Move the beads over on the Rekenrek as students count.)
S: 1 ten, 2 tens, 3 tens, , 9 tens, 10 tens.
T: (Write 10 in the tens position on the place value chart.) Since we were only counting tens, there are
no additional ones, just 10 tens. (Write 0 in the ones position on the place value chart.)
T: 10 tens is the same as ?
S: 100.

T: What if I add 1 more bead? (Hold up the 20-bead Rekenrek, and slide 1 bead over.) Do I still have
10 tens?
S: Yes!
T: But I also have?
S: 1 one.
T: I need a volunteer to change our place value chart to show 10 tens and 1 one. (Select a student, and
wait as she erases 0 in the ones position and writes 1.)
T: 10 tens 1 one is?
S: 101. (Some students may say one hundred and one. If they do, explain that 100 + 1 describes 100
and 1, but the name of the number is one hundred one. This is similar to naming other numbers,
such as 25. Twenty and 5 is written 20 + 5. To say the number, we say twenty-five.
T: We had 10 tens and then 10 tens 1. Next, we would have? (Move another bead on the 20-bead
Rekenrek.)
S: 10 tens 2.
T: Lets change our place value charts to record the tens
and ones. NOTES ON
T: 10 tens 2 is the same as? MULTIPLE MEANS
OF REPRESENTATION:
S: 102.
If some students need more support,
T: Lets see. 100, 101, 102. Next would be? (Slide a
have them look at the Rekenreks as
third bead.) they count. This visual support will
S: 103. help them to identify the number of
T: How many tens and ones are in 103? Lets change our tens and then the number of additional
place value charts to record the tens and ones. ones.
T: Lets count together starting at 98. Listen for when

I say to stop.
S/T: (Count together without the Rekenrek.) 98, 99, 100, 101, 102, 103, 104, 105, 106, 107, 108, 109.
T: Stop!
T: How many tens and ones are in 109? Talk with a partner. Lets show that many on the Rekenrek,
and record it on your place value chart. (Circulate and notice students recordings.)
T: Lets look at the Rekenrek. It shows how many tens?
S: 10 tens!
T: It shows how many additional ones?
S: 9 ones!
T: What if we slide over one more bead? How many tens would we have then?
S: 11 tens!
T: (Slide over one more bead so that the Rekenreks now show 11 tens.) Write this amount on your
place value chart. Tell your partner what number has 11 tens. (Wait as students complete the task.)
T: 11 tens is the same as?
S: One hundred ten!

Repeat the process, having students count from a given

number and stop at a given number. Students identify
the number in both its traditional form and its unit
form. A suggested sequence would be 97 to 103, 108 to
112, and 108 to 120. Alternate between saying
numbers the regular way and the Say Ten way. If
students need more practice, the following partner
activity may be used.
Partner A uses quick tens and ones to draw a
number between or including 100 and 120.
Partner B records the number in the place value
chart while Partner A writes the number below
his drawing.
The two partners check that they have matching
numbers and then switch roles to start again.

Lesson Objective: Count to 120 in unit form using only

tens and ones. Represent numbers to 120 as tens and
ones on the place value chart.
the lesson.

Look at Problem 1(d). What similarities and differences do you notice between reading a number
and seeing the number in tens and ones?
Look at Problem 2. Which matches were easy to identify, and which were more challenging? Explain
why this was so.
Choose a number from Problem 1. What is another way you could show this number in unit form?
(This question is best used if students have been highly successful with todays lesson.)
How can counting the Say Ten way help you with numbers from 100 to 120?
Look at your Application Problem. Share your strategies for solving the problem.


Name Date
tens ones tens ones
a. 74 b. 78
tens ones tens ones

c. d.
9 1 10 9
tens ones tens ones
e. 116 f. 103
tens ones tens ones

g. h.
11 2 12 0
tens ones tens ones

i. j. 102
10 5

2. Match.
a. tens ones
10 tens 5 ones
9 7
b. tens ones
10 tens 7 ones
10 7
c. tens ones 9 tens 7 ones
11 0
12 tens 0 ones
d. tens ones
10 5
110
e. tens ones
10 1
11 tens 8 ones
f. tens ones
12 0 101
g. tens ones
11 8

Name Date
tens ones tens ones
a. 83 b. 9 4
tens ones tens ones

c. d. 106
11 5
2. Write the number.
a. 10 tens 2 ones is the number .
b. 11 tens 4 ones is the number .

Name Date
tens ones tens ones
a. 81 b. 98
tens ones tens ones

c. d.
11 7 10 8
tens ones tens ones
e. 104 f. 111
2. Write the number.
a. 9 tens 2 ones is the number ______. b. 8 tens 4 ones is the number ______.
c. 11 tens 3 ones is the number _____. d. 10 tens 9 ones is the number ____.
e. 10 tens 1 ones is the number _____. f. 11 tens 6 ones is the number _____.

3. Match.
a. tens ones
11 tens 4 ones
10 2
b. tens ones
9 tens 5 ones
9 5
c. tens ones 11 tens 8 ones
11 4
11 tens 0 ones
d. tens ones
11 0
102
e. tens ones
10 8
10 tens 0 ones
f. tens ones
10 0 108
g. tens ones
11 8

Lesson 9
Objective: Represent up to 120 objects with a written numeral.

Emi and Julio together have 17 pet mice. How many mice might each child
have?
Extension: Who has more, and how many more does that child have?
Note: Todays Application Problem practices decomposing a two-digit
number and can have more than one correct answer. This work supports
students compositions and decompositions when they begin Topic C in
Lesson 10. Students compose, decompose, and recompose various two-digit
addends.
Sprint: +1, 1, +10, 10 1.NBT.5 (10 minutes)

Beep-Counting 1.NBT.1, 1.NBT.5 (4 minutes)
Sprint: +1, 1, +10, 10 (10 minutes)

Materials: (S) +1, 1, +10, 10 Sprint
Note: This Sprint reviews the grade-level standard of mentally adding or subtracting 10 and supports
students understanding of place value.
Beep-Counting (4 minutes)
Note: This activity reviews counting and reading numbers to 120.
Write number sequences on the board with missing numbers. Students read the sequence aloud, saying
beep for the missing number. Then, students say the missing number on the teachers signal.

121

Use the following suggested sequence, as time permits:

a. 10, 11, 12, ___ e. 17, 18, __, 20 i. 12, 11, ___, 9
b. 110, 111, 112, ___ f. 117, 118, ___, 120 j. 112, 111, ___, 109
c. 20, 19, 18, ___ g. 8, 9, ___, 11 k. ___, 7, 8, 9
d. 120, 119, 118, ___ h. 108, 109, ___, 111 l. ___, 107, 108, 109
Materials: (T) 12 ten-sticks of linking cubes (ideally 6 red and 6 white ten-sticks), 10 additional loose linking
cubes (S) Personal white board
Gather students with their personal white boards into a semicircle in the meeting area. The linking cubes
should be placed close to the teacher but not in front of students.
T: Lets use our efficient counting skills to count different combinations of linking cubes. When I put
out the linking cubes, your job is to count them as quickly as you can and write down the number of
cubes I have. I put most of the cubes into sticks of ten, which should make it faster for you.
T: (Place 5 red ten-sticks and 5 white ten-sticks in the center for students to see. Scatter them far
enough apart for students to count the 10 sticks. Wait as students count the sticks and record.)
T: How many linking cubes are here?
S: 100.
T: (Take all the sticks back. Place 10 ten-sticks down again, this time in a 5-group formation, with two
rows of 5 sticks. Wait as students count and record. Check that students are recording 100 using the
proper digits.)
T: How many linking cubes are here?
S: 100.
T: How did you know so quickly this time?
S: Its set up like 5 groups. 5 tens and 5 tens is 10 tens. 10 tens is 100. I saw 10 sets of sticks
when I looked at them, so I knew 10 tens was 100.
T: (Lay out 12 ten-sticks using the 5-group formation with 2 more sticks on the side. As students count
MP.4 and record, watch for proper notation for 120.)
T: How many tens do you see?
NOTES ON
S: 12 tens.
MULTIPLE MEANS
T: How many cubes do you see?
OF ACTION AND
S: 120 cubes. EXPRESSION:
T: How many ones would that be? For students who are struggling, work
S: 120. together to write the number in a place
value chart, and then check the
placement of the digits in the number.

122

Repeat the process with the following number of linking cubes.

99
101
109
NOTES ON
110 MULTIPLE MEANS
111 OF ENGAGEMENT:
113 As a challenge for some students, use
other combinations of tens and ones,
119 such as 9 tens 16 ones.
115
104
107
110 made with 10 ten-sticks and 10 additional separated ones
For more combinations, lay out objects for numbers between 98 and 120 using more than 10 ones, along with
ten-sticks.

Lesson Objective: Represent up to 120 objects with a

written numeral.
lesson.

123

How many objects are in Problem 4? Problem 5?
Which number is greater? Which picture takes
up more space? What is another example of
more objects taking up less space? Talk to your
partner.
Look at Problems 8 and 9. Which problem was
quicker to draw and solve? Why?
How is counting large numbers of objects like
counting smaller numbers of objects? Explain
your thinking. How is it different?
Which beep-counting sequences are the quickest
for you to answer? Why?
Look at your Application Problem. What
combinations did you use to show 17 pet mice?
Are there other combinations that could be
used?


124

NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Lesson 9 Sprint 1
Number Correct:
A
Name Date
*Write the missing number. Pay attention to the addition or subtraction sign.
1. 5+1= 16. 29 + 10 =
2. 15 + 1 = 17. 9+1=
3. 25 + 1 = 18. 19 + 1 =
4. 5 + 10 = 19. 29 + 1 =
5. 15 + 10 = 20. 39 + 1 =
6. 25 + 10 = 21. 40 1 =
7. 81= 22. 30 1 =
8. 18 1 = 23. 20 1 =
9. 28 1 = 24. 20 + = 21
10. 38 1 = 25. 20 + = 30
11. 38 10 = 26. 27 + = 37
12. 28 10 = 27. 27 + = 28
13. 18 10 = 28. + 10 = 34
14. 9 + 10 = 29. 10 = 14
15. 19 + 10 = 30. 10 = 24

125

NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Lesson 9 Sprint 1
Number Correct:
B
Name Date
*Write the missing number. Pay attention to the addition or subtraction sign.
1. 4+1= 16. 28 + 10 =
2. 14 + 1 = 17. 9+1=
3. 24 + 1 = 18. 19 + 1 =
4. 6 + 10 = 19. 29 + 1 =
5. 16 + 10 = 20. 39 + 1 =
6. 26 + 10 = 21. 40 1 =
7. 71= 22. 30 1 =
8. 17 1 = 23. 20 1 =
9. 27 1 = 24. 10 + = 11
10. 37 1 = 25. 10 + = 20
11. 37 10 = 26. 22 + = 32
12. 27 10 = 27. 22 + = 23
13. 17 10 = 28. + 10 = 39
14. 8 + 10 = 29. 10 = 19
15. 18 + 10 = 30. 10 = 29

126

Name Date
Count the objects. Fill in the place value chart, and write the number on the line.
1. tens ones
_______
2.
tens ones
_______
3.
tens ones
_______
4.
tens ones
_______
5. tens ones
_______

127

6.
tens ones
_______
7.
tens ones
_______
Use quick tens and ones to represent the following numbers. Write the number on the
line.
tens ones tens ones
8. 10 9 9. 12 0

128

Name Date
1. Count the objects. Fill in the place value chart, and write the number on the line.
tens ones
_______
2. Use quick tens and ones to represent the following numbers. Write the number on
the line.
a. b.
tens ones tens ones
11 0 _______ 10 1 _______

129

Name Date
Count the objects. Fill in the place value chart, and write the number on the line.
1.
tens ones
_______
2.
tens ones
_______
3.
tens ones
_______
4.
tens ones
_______
5.
tens ones
_______

130

6.
tens ones
_______
7.
tens ones
_______
Use quick tens and ones to represent the following numbers.

Write the number on the line.
tens ones tens ones
8. 11 0 9. 10 5

131

1 Mathematics Curriculum
GRADE
GRADE 1 MODULE 6
Topic C
Addition to 100 Using Place Value
Understanding
1.NBT.4, 1.NBT.6
Focus Standards: 1.NBT.4 Add within 100, including adding a two-digit number and a one-digit number, and
adding a two-digit number and a multiple of 10, using concrete models or drawings and
strategies based on place value, properties of operations, and/or the relationship
between addition and subtraction; relate the strategy to a written method and explain
the reasoning used. Understand that in adding two-digit numbers, one adds tens and
tens, ones and ones; and sometimes it is necessary to compose a ten.
1.NBT.6 Subtract multiples of 10 in the range 1090 from multiples of 10 in the range 1090
(positive or zero differences), using concrete models or drawings and strategies based
on place value, properties of operations, and/or the relationship between addition and
Coherence -Links from: G1M4 Place Value, Comparison, Addition and Subtraction to 40
During Topic C, students apply all of their place value and Level 3 strategy knowledge to add pairs of two-digit
numbers to sums within 100. To this point, students have only added pairs of two-digit numbers within 40.
They now extend their skills and strategies to larger pairs, such as 36 + 57, using all of the same methods.
Lesson 10 focuses students on number work with tens as they add and subtract multiples of 10 from
multiples of 10. Students see that 20 + 70 is the same as 2 tens + 7 tens and that 80 50 is the same as
8 tens 5 tens (1.NBT.4, 1.NBT.6).
Building from student work with multiples of 10, Lesson 11 scaffolds students to
add a multiple of 10 to any two-digit number, such as 64 + 30 (1.NBT.4). While
some students may initially apply their ability to mentally add 10 by counting on
by tens (64, 74, 84, 94), students also decompose 64 into 60 and 4 to solve, as
shown to the right.
Topic C: Addition to 100 Using Place Value Understanding

132

NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Topic C 1 6
In Lesson 12, students add a pair of two-digit numbers when the

ones digits have a sum less than or equal to 10 (1.NBT.4). They
continue using strategies developed in Module 4. For example,
when adding 47 + 23, students may choose to decompose the
second addend into 20 and 3. They then add 20 to 47, making 67,
and then add the remaining ones. Other students may choose to
add the ones to the first addend and then add on the remaining
tens, as shown to the right.
Lessons 13 and 14 focus on the most challenging addition work of
this grade level as students add a pair of two-digit numbers when
the ones digits have a sum greater than 10, as shown to the right
(1.NBT.4).
During Lesson 15, students see how they can align materials or
drawings to more distinctly separate and add tens with tens and
ones with ones, recording the total below the drawings. Students
connect this work with their decomposition work from Lessons 10
and 11, as shown to the right.
Lesson 16 extends this work, having students add a pair of two-digit numbers, such as 36 + 57, recording the
13 as 1 ten 3 ones as a part of their written method for recording their process. During Lesson 17, students
continue to strengthen their skills and strategies to solve double-digit addition problems (1.NBT.4).
A Teaching Sequence Toward Mastery of Addition to 100 Using Place Value Understanding
Objective 1: Add and subtract multiples of 10 from multiples of 10 to 100, including dimes.
(Lesson 10)
Objective 2: Add a multiple of 10 to any two-digit number within 100.

(Lesson 11)
Objective 3: Add a pair of two-digit numbers when the ones digits have a sum less than or equal to 10.
(Lesson 12)
Objective 4: Add a pair of two-digit numbers when the ones digits have a sum greater than 10 using
decomposition.
(Lessons 1314)
Objective 5: Add a pair of two-digit numbers when the ones digits have a sum greater than 10 with
drawing. Record the total below.
(Lesson 15)
Objective 6: Add a pair of two-digit numbers when the ones digits have a sum greater than 10 with
drawing. Record the new ten below.
(Lessons 1617)
Topic C: Addition to 100 Using Place Value Understanding

133

Lesson 10
Objective: Add and subtract multiples of 10 from multiples of 10 to 100,
including dimes.

Fran had 8 lizards. Anton gave some lizards to Fran. Fran now has
13 lizards. How many lizards did Anton give Fran?
Note: Todays problem is an add to with change unknown
problem type. Some students may use a double tape diagram to
solve, while others may choose to use a single tape diagram to
solve.

Race to the Top! 1.OA.6 (5 minutes)
Get to Ten(s) 1.NBT.4 (3 minutes)

improve their scores on their current levels.

including dimes. 134

Race to the Top! (5 minutes)

Materials: (S) Personal white board, Race to the Top! (Fluency Template), 2 dice per pair of students
Note: This fluency activity primarily targets the core fluency for Grade 1. Remember to closely monitor the
strategies of students who are not performing well on the Practice Sets or Sprints. For students whose fine
motor skills are not well developed, activities like Race to the Top! allow them to demonstrate their growing
fluency.
Assign partners. Students take turns rolling the dice, saying an addition sentence, and recording the sums on
the graph. The game ends when time runs out or one of the columns reaches the top of the graph.
Get to Ten(s) (3 minutes)

Materials: (T) 100-bead Rekenrek
Note: In this fluency activity, students apply their knowledge of partners to ten to find analogous partners to
multiples of 10. Students need this skill when they learn to apply the make ten strategy to add two two-digit
numbers in Lesson 13.
Model with the Rekenrek for the first few problems. Then, put the Rekenrek away to give students practice
mentally getting to the next ten.
T: (Show 9.) Say the number.
S: 9.
T: Say the number sentence to make ten.
S: 9 + 1 = 10.
T: (Move 1 bead to make 10. Show 19.)
T: Say the number.
S: 19.
T: Say the number sentence to make 20.
S: 19 + 1 = 20.
Continue with the following suggested sequence: 59, 79, 99; 5, 65, 85, 95; 8, 48, 78, 98; and 7, 37, 87, 97.
Materials: (T) Chart paper, 10 dimes (S) Personal white board, number bond/number sentence set
(Template), 5 dimes
Students sit in the meeting area in a semicircle formation.

T: (Write 4 + 3 on the chart. Call up two volunteers.)
Using your magic counting sticks, show us 4 + 3.
S: (Student A shows 4 fingers; Student B shows 3 fingers.)


T: How many fingers are there? Say the number sentence.

S: 4 + 3 = 7. NOTES ON
T: (Complete the number sentence on the chart.) Yes. MULTIPLE MEANS
4 fingers + 3 fingers = 7 fingers. OF REPRESENTATION:
On their personal white boards, have students write the Students demonstrate a true
number sentence, use math drawings to show understanding of math concepts when
4 + 3 = 7, and make a number bond while recording the they can apply them in a variety of
information on a chart. situations. Some students may not be
able to make the connection between
T: Lets pretend these circles stand for bananas! Say the different number bonds as seen in this
number sentence using bananas as the unit. lesson. Their path to abstract thinking
S: 4 bananas + 3 bananas = 7 bananas. may be a little longer than others.
Support these students with the use of
T: (Call for five additional volunteers to join the two
manipulatives (linking cubes and coins)
volunteers.) Show us 4 tens + 3 tens using your magic and plenty of practice on their personal
counting sticks. white boards.
S: (Clasp hands to show 4 tens and 3 tens.)
T: (Help the first four students stand closer together to
show 4 tens.)
T: (Point to the first four students.) How many tens do we have here?
S: 4 tens.
T: (Point to the last three students closely standing next to each
other.) How many tens do we have here?
S: 3 tens.
T: How many tens are there in all?
S: 7 tens.
T: Say the number sentence the Say Ten way. (If students struggle,
say, Say the number sentence starting with 4 tens.)
S: 4 tens + 3 tens = 7 tens.
T: Say the number sentence the regular way starting with 40.
S: 40 + 30 = 70.
T: (Record the number sentence on the chart.)
T: (Point to the first problem on the chart.) Hmmm, how can
knowing 4 + 3 = 7 help us with 4 tens + 3 tens? Turn and talk to
your partner.
S: 4 tens + 3 tens = 7 tens is just like 4 + 3 = 7. Its just 4 things
and 3 things make 7 things 4 fingers and 3 fingers make
7 fingers. 4 bananas and 3 bananas make 7 bananas. 4 tens and
3 tens make 7 tens.
T: The numbers stay the same. The numbers, 4 and 3 and 7, stay
the same, but the units change.
Direct students to write the number sentence, use math drawings, and make a number bond while charting
their responses as shown to the bottom right.


Repeat the process using the following suggested sequence, and have students solve each problem using the
Say Ten way and the regular way:
7 tens 4 tens
30 + 60
9 dimes 3 dimes
60 cents + 20 cents
70 + 30
10 tens 4 tens
T: (Write 6 dimes 4 dimes on the chart.) Draw a number bond for this subtraction problem, and
share your thinking with your partner.
S: 6 dimes is the total. 4 dimes is one of the parts. We know one part. The mystery is the other
part to make 6 dimes or 60 cents 6 dimes take away 4 dimes is 2 dimes 60 cents take away
40 cents is 20 cents I can take away a part from the total to find the missing part. (Show the
number bond with 2 dimes still missing.)
T: What addition sentence can we write to match this number bond? Remember, we can say
unknown or mystery number.
S: 4 dimes + the mystery number = 6 dimes. (Record on the chart.)
T: What is the missing part?
S: 2 dimes!
T: Say the subtraction sentence and the related
addition sentence the Say Ten way.
S: 6 tens 4 tens = 2 tens. 4 tens + 2 tens = 6 tens.
T: Lets say it the regular way, too.
S: 60 40 = 20. 40 + 20 = 60.
Repeat the process as needed to support students
understanding.



Lesson Objective: Add and subtract multiples of 10 from

multiples of 10 to 100, including dimes.
the lesson.
Look at Problems 1 and 2. Did you show your
bonds the regular way or the Say Ten way?
What did you notice about Problems 6 and 7?
Can you find another set of problems that show
a similar pattern?
Using Problem 10, create a related problem by drawing a picture and writing the number sentence in
the same way that Problems 6 and 7 go together.
Write all the ways you can make a total of 10 tens or 100 using only tens. You may use three
addends!
Explain how knowing 3 + 6 can help solve 30 + 60.
How can Race to the Top! and the Core Fluency Practice Sets help you solve addition and subtraction
problems from todays lesson?



Name Date
Complete the number bonds and number sentences to match the picture.
1.
50
3 tens + ____ tens = ____ tens
30 20
30 + 20 =_______
2.
____ tens + ____ tens = ____ tens
_________________________
3.
____ tens ____ tens = ____tens
_________________________
4.
____ tens + ____ tens = ____ tens
_________________________
5.
____ tens ____ tens = ____ tens
_________________________


Count the dimes to add or subtract. Write a number sentence to match the value of
the dimes.
6. + 40 + 20 =
_____________________________
7. _____________________________
8. +
_____________________________
9.
_____________________________
10.
_____________________________
11. Fill in the missing numbers.
a. 40 + 40 = _____ b. 50 30 = _____ c. 10 + _____ = 70
d. 60 _____ = 0 e. 90 _____ = 10 f. 70 + _____ = 90
g. 50 + 40 = _____ h. 100 30 = _____ i. 100 _____ = 70


Name Date
a. 40 + 50 = _____ b. 80 60 = _____ c. 30 + _____ = 70
2. Write a number sentence to match the picture.
_____________________________


Name Date
1. Complete the number bond or number sentence, and draw a line to the matching
picture.
a.
90
30
b.
_____ 40 = 60
60
c.
40
d.
80 _____ = 60


2. Count the dimes to add or subtract. Write a number sentence to match the dimes.
a.
+ 40 + 20 =
_____________________________
b.
_____________________________
c.
+
_____________________________
d.
_____________________________
a. 70 + _____ = 90 b. _____ + 30 = 80 c. 100 _____ = 20
d. 30 + 60 = _____ e. 70 _____ = 20 f. 20 + _____ = 60
g. _____ 20 = 60 h. 90 _____ = 20 i. 50 + _____ = 100


Names Date
Race to the Top!
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
race to the top


NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Lesson 10 Template 1
_____ _____ _____
_____ ten _____ ten _____ ten
______ ______ ______
number bond/number sentence set


Lesson 11
Objective: Add a multiple of 10 to any two-digit number within 100.

Ben sharpened 5 pencils. He has 8 more unsharpened pencils

than sharpened pencils. How many unsharpened pencils does
Ben have?
Note: Todays comparison with bigger unknown poses the
additional challenge that there is only one person in the story.
If students are still struggling with comparison problem types,
consider altering the problem so that two students pencils are
being compared. Have a brief student discussion of the solution
before moving on to the Fluency Practice.

Get to the Next Ten 1.NBT.4 (2 minutes)

After students do todays Practice Sets, ask them to stand if they tried a new level today or improved their
score from the previous day. Consider having students clap once for each person standing to celebrate
improvement.

146


Materials: (T) 10 dimes, 10 pennies, can
Note: This activity reviews yesterdays lesson (Lesson 10), where students added and subtracted tens within
100.
Repeat the process from Lesson 5. Now that students have learned to add and subtract multiples of 10 from
multiples of 10, the teacher may take out more than one dime at a time and have students calculate the
remaining dimes.
Get to the Next Ten (2 minutes)

Note: This fluency activity builds on Lesson 10s Get to Ten(s) activity to prepare students for Lesson 13.
Say a number. Students say an addition sentence to get to the next multiple of 10. For the first few
problems, begin with a number from 0 to 9 to provide students with a helper problem on which to build.
Then, say numbers without providing the helper problem.
T: Say the addition sentence to get to the next ten. 9.
S: 9 + 1 = 10.
T: 59.
S: 59 + 1 = 60.
Continue with the following suggested sequence: 5, 65; 8, 78; 7, 87; and 6, 96.

NOTES ON
Materials: (T) 100-bead Rekenrek (S) Personal white board MULTIPLE MEANS
OF ENGAGEMENT:
Have students gather in the meeting area in a semicircle At this point in the year, students
formation with their materials. should be able to add a multiple of ten
to any multiple of 10 within 100.
T: (Write 40 + 30 = ? on chart paper.) On your personal If some students are struggling, have
white board, write the number sentence, and replace them use linking cubes in ten-sticks or
the question mark with the missing number. (Wait as quick ten drawings for more concrete
students complete the task.) or pictorial supports. Use the language
T: 40 + 30 is? of place value so that the dialogue
begins to become part of their
S: 70. independent thinking. Work toward
solving without the concrete supports.

147

T: Explain how you know that 40 + 30 equals 70. You can draw or write on the chart paper to explain
your thinking.
S: If you use the Rekenrek, you slide 4 tens over and then 3 tens over, and thats 7 tens, or 70. Four
tens plus 3 tens is 7 tens. Thats 70. In the place value chart, you add 3 tens to the 4 tens you
have. (Post or show yesterdays chart paper, if available. Draw the place value chart and the
number bond on todays chart paper.)
T: (Draw a line to start a new section of the chart paper. Write 45 + 30 = ? Move over 45 beads on the
100-bead Rekenrek.) On your personal white board, write this number sentence, and replace the
question mark with the solution.
T: (Wait as students complete the task. If students do not know the answer right away, provide more
time for them to remember solution strategies, e.g., quick ten drawings, the Rekenrek, counting on,
decomposing, and composing).
T: 45 + 30 is?
S: 75.
T: Who would like to share how they solved 45 + 30? Listen to
your friends ideas, and be ready to ask questions or
comment. (As students are explaining, record their examples
on the chart using number bonds and place value charts.)
S: On the Rekenrek, there are 4 rows and 3 rows and 5 extra
beads, so thats 7 tens and 5 ones, which is 75.
T: Does anyone have a question or comment about the
Rekenrek solution?
S: Why did you say row? The five extras are a row, too.
S: Because I meant a row of ten. I guess I should say a full row.
T: Did anyone solve 45 + 30 in a different way?
S: I started at 45 and counted on ten 3 times. 45, 55, 65, 75.
T: Does anyone have a question or comment about the
MP.3 counting on solution?
S: Could you start counting on from 30?
S: Sure, I guess so. 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 75. Its just easier NOTES ON
for me the other way. MULTIPLE MEANS
T: Did anyone solve 45 + 30 in a different way? OF ACTION AND
EXPRESSION:
S: I broke 45 into 40 and 5 with the number bond, and
Some students may get confused with
then I added 40 and 30 first, which is 70, and then
all of the strategies available to them
added on 5 to make 75.
for solving problems. As the teacher, it
T: Are there questions or comments about the number might help these students to include
bond solution? one consistent method for solving.
S: Thats easy for me. I like that better than my way. Then, students can share alternative
strategies to allow exposure, but
T: Why? consistency really helps students who
S: Because its like I could just see it better. I counted on, are struggling.
and it seemed slower, too.

148

T: Did anyone solve 45 + 30 in a different way?

MP.3
S: I thought of the place value chart and just added 3 tens to 4 tens and left the 5 ones alone.
That gave me 75.
T: Are there comments and questions about the place value chart solution?
S: I dont understand what you mean that you left the 5 ones alone.
S: I mean when I was adding the tens, the ones didnt change.
T: It is important to really listen to your friends solution strategies so that you can comment and ask
questions.
Provide time for students to solve the following suggested sequence of problems. Students who would
benefit from more concrete or pictorial support may use linking cubes in ten-sticks and ones, dimes and
pennies, or quick ten drawings.
51 + 40
24 + 60
50 + 38
62 cents + 3 dimes
8 dimes + 12 cents
63 + ____ = 93
14 + ____ = 74
____ + 39 = 59
____ + 40 = 98
After each problem, have one or two students share a
different method for solving the problem.

Lesson Objective: Add a multiple of 10 to any two-digit

number within 100.

149


lesson.
Look at Problem 5 (c) and (d). How could
solving Problem 5(c) help you solve Problem
5(d)?
Look at Problem 6 (a) and (b). Did you or your
partner use a different strategy than the number
bond work from the top of the page? If so,
explain your strategy.
Look at Problem 6 (c) and (d). How did you find
the missing addends? Explain your thinking.
How is todays work similar to and different from
yesterdays work?
How did the coin drop fluency activity help you
get better at adding tens?


150

Name Date
Solve using the pictures. Complete the number sentence to match.
1.
____ + ____ = ____

2.
____ + ____ = ____
3.
____ + ____ = ____
4.
____ + ____ = ____

151

5. Solve.
a. 47 + 40 = ______ b. 57 + 30 = ______
c. 35 + 30 = ______ d. 35 + 50 = ______
e. 30 + 63 = ______ f. 40 + 39 = ______
6. Solve and explain your thinking to a partner.
a. 2 + 50 = _____ b. 58 + 40 = _____
c. 48 + _____ = 98 d. 60 + _____ = 86

152

Name Date
Solve. Use quick tens and ones drawings or number bonds.
a. 42 + 50 = ______ b. 30 + 57 = ______

153

Name Date
1. Solve using the pictures. Complete the number sentence to match.
a.
____ + ____ = ____
b.
____ + ____ = ____
c.
____ + ____ = ____
d.
____ + ____ = ____

154

2. Use number bonds to solve.
a. 38 + 40 = ______ b. 54 + 30 = ______
c. 46 + 40 = ______ d. 30 + 57 = ______
e. 20 + 68 = ______ f. 25 + 70 = ______
3. Solve. You may use number bonds to help you.
a. 72 + 20 = _____ b. 48 + 50 = _____
c. 46 + _____ = 96 d. _____ + 40 = 87

155

Lesson 12
Objective: Add a pair of two-digit numbers when the ones digits have a
sum less than or equal to 10.

Kiana wants to have 14 stickers in her folder. She needs 6

more stickers to make her goal. How many stickers does she
have right now?
Note: Todays problem is an add to with start unknown
problem type. This can be challenging because some students
associate the word more in a problem as meaning they must
add.

Add Tens 1.NBT.4 (3 minutes)
Analogous Addition Sentences 1.OA.6, 1.NBT.4 (2 minutes)

Note: Choose an appropriate Sprint based on the needs of the class. As students work, pay attention to their
strategies and the number of problems they are answering. If the majority of students complete the first
three quadrants today, try giving them the next level of difficulty when administering the next Sprint. If many
students are not making it to the third quadrant, consider repeating todays Sprint.
Lesson 12: Add a pair of two-digit numbers when the ones digits have a sum less
than or equal to 10. 156


Core Addition Sprint 1
Core Subtraction Sprint
Core Fluency Sprint: Totals of 5, 6, and 7
Add Tens (3 minutes)

Materials: (S) Personal white board, die per pair of students
Note: This fluency activity reviews adding multiples of 10 to two-digit numbers, which helps prepare students
for todays lesson.
Choose a student to help model the activity. Then, assign partners of equal ability to work together.
Partner A writes or draws a number (with quick tens and ones) between 10 and 40 (e.g., 25).
Partner B rolls the die to determine the number of tens to add (e.g., if she rolls 5, add 5 tens).
Both partners write the number sentence on their personal white boards and check each others
work (e.g., 25 + 50 = 75).
Analogous Addition Sentences (2 minutes)

Note: This fluency activity encourages students to use sums within 10 to solve more challenging problems.
Reviewing adding a one-digit number to a two-digit number when the ones have a sum less than or equal to
10 prepares students for todays lesson.
T: Say the number sentence with the answer. 3 + 2.
S: 3 + 2 = 5.
T: 43 + 2.
S: 43 + 2 = 45.
T: 42 + 3.
S: 42 + 3 = 45.
T: 3 + 42.
S: 3 + 42 = 45.
Continue with the following suggested sequence:
6+2 4+3 6+3
56 + 2 64 + 3 96 + 3
96 + 2 63 + 4 93 + 6
42 + 6 4 + 63 6 + 93


NOTES ON
Materials: (T) Chart paper (S) Personal white board MULTIPLE MEANS
OF ACTION AND
Begin todays lesson with students sitting at their desks or EXPRESSION:
tables with their materials. Some students may benefit from more
Three sets of problems have been provided for students to concrete or pictorial supports. Use
linking cubes in ten-sticks and ones as
extend their double-digit addition skills from Module 4. Choose
well as quick ten drawings for these
the appropriate set, or portion of a set, that best meets
students. While supporting students
students needs. Although it may be tempting to begin with a with these materials, be sure to
review of a particular method to solve problems, refrain from connect them with number sentences
doing so at the onset of the lesson. Instead, encourage and with decomposed bonds to support
MP.5 remind students of their toolkit: number sentences, the place increased understanding. See
value chart, linking cubes, drawings, number bonds, counting Module 4 Lesson 24 for examples of
on, etc. Although students may ask questions, resist giving hints how these materials have been used
or solving the problem as a class. Continue, however, to ask for similar instructional objectives.
questions that will prompt students to use their toolkit. For
example, How can this be solved? What method could you
use?
After each problem, have students share their solutions and
invite one or two students to explain their strategies. Today, try
to preselect students who have used varied strategies, such as
adding ones first or adding tens first. Encourage students to use
place value language to describe strategies for solving. Ask
questions such as, What is another way this can be solved?
Why did you choose your method?
In Problems 14, pairs of two-digit numbers from Module 4 Lessons 24 and 25 are presented with an
analogous problem using numbers from 40 to 100 from Module 6.
Problems 58 provide a scaffold-less opportunity to add pairs of two-digit numbers.
Problems 912 encourage students to identify the missing number in varied positions within the number
sentence.
Problems 14 Problems 58 Problems 912
24 + 13, then solve 54 + 13 76 + 23 63 + ____ = 84
15 + 13, then solve 45 + 23 23 + 57 48 + ____ = 100
15 + 15, then solve 45 + 45 41 + 39 ____ + 59 = 70
26 + 14, then solve 66 + 34 34 + 53 32 + ____ = 100

Should students need additional support, the following dialogue presents a more guided approach to
Problems 14.
T: (Write 24 + 10 on chart paper.) Use quick tens to
show and solve this problem. (Wait as students draw
on their personal white boards.) NOTES ON
MULTIPLE MEANS
T: 24 + 10 is?
OF ACTION AND
S: 34. EXPRESSION:
T: (Write 24 + 13 on chart paper.) Use quick tens to Encourage students to explain their
show and solve this problem. (Wait as students draw thinking about adding or subtracting
on their boards.) tens. Students may learn as much
T: 24 + 13 is? from one anothers reasoning as from
the lesson. This also provides the
S: 37.
opportunity for the teacher to learn
T: What did you do to solve this problem? Turn and talk more about a students level of
with a partner. (Wait as students discuss.) thinking and ability to express that
S: I took apart 13, making it 10 and 3. I added 10 first; thinking.
thats 34, and then 3 more makes 37. I already
knew 24 + 10 was 34, so 3 more was 37.
T: (As students explain, use number bonds with number
sentences to record their process.)
T: Great job adding the tens and then adding the rest of
the ones.
T: (Write 54 + 13 on chart paper.) Solve this problem
using your same thinking. If quick tens will help you,
use them, or challenge yourself to use number bonds
with your number sentence to solve the problem.
(Wait as students draw on personal white boards.)
T: 54 + 13 is?
S: 67.
Invite students to share how they solved this problem. Emphasize their process of decomposing at least one
number into tens and ones as they put the addends together. Repeat this process for 15 + 13 and 45 + 13.
When beginning 15 + 15, note that students may choose to add the ones first as shown below.
T: (Write 15 + 15 on chart paper.) Solve this problem. (Wait as
students solve.)
T: 15 + 15 is?
S: 30.
T: What did you do to solve this problem?
S: I took apart the second 15, making it 10 and 5. I added 10
first; thats 25, and then 5 more makes it 30. I started the
same way, but I added 15 + 5 first; thats 20, and then I added
10 more to make 30. I made both fifteens into 10 and 5.
I added 5 and 5 to make 10, so then I had 3 tens. Thats 30.

Use number bonds and number sentences to record

students methods. If all students add the tens first, pose
the other methods as ways that solved the problem, as an
opportunity to consider alternative methods.
T: (Point to the example while describing each
method.) Some of you broke the second 15 into
tens and ones and added the tens first and then
the ones. Some of you broke the second 15 into
tens and ones and added the ones first and then
the tens. A few of you broke both fifteens into
tens and ones and added ones with ones and
tens with tens. Did you all find the total of 30?
S: Yes!
Have students work on the following problems or repeat
the same process with the following: 45 + 45, 26 + 14, and
66 + 34.

should solve these problems using the RDW approach used
for Application Problems.
Lesson Objective: Add a pair of two-digit numbers

when the ones digits have a sum less than or equal to
10.
the lesson.

Look at Problem 1. Did you solve all of your problems the same way? What was your strategy?
Did anyone solve some problems one way and then use a different strategy to solve other
problems? Explain your reasoning.
How does yesterdays work with adding multiples of 10 connect to todays work?
How did your fluency work today help you with todays problems? Use specific examples to explain
your thinking.
Look at your Application Problem. Share your solution and your strategy for solving.


Name Date
1. Solve.
a. 84 + 12 = _____ b. 71 + 26 = _____
c. 57 + 22 = _____ d. 59 + 41 = _____
e. 35 + 65 = _____ f. 26 + 54 = _____
g. 57 + 42 = _____ h. 37 + 63 = _____

2. Solve.
a. 45 + 13 = _____ b. 45 + 23 = _____
c. 21 + 27 = _____ d. 27 + 23 = _____
e. 48 + 32 = _____ f. 48 + 52 = _____
g. 34 + 65 = _____ h. 46 + 43 = _____

Name Date
Solve using number bonds. You may choose to add the ones or tens first. Write the
two number sentences to show what you did.
a. 56 + 43 = _____ b. 22 + 75 = _____

Name Date
1. Solve.
a. 46 + 22 = _____ b. 74 + 23 = _____
c. 54 + 25 = _____ d. 68 + 31 = _____
e. 45 + 55 = _____ f. 86 + 13 = _____
g. 37 + 52 = _____ h. 47 + 52 = _____

2. Solve using number bonds. You may choose to add the ones or tens first. Write the
two number sentences to show what you did.
a. 76 + 23 = _____ b. 45 + 33 = _____
c. 31 + 67 = _____ d. 57 + 32 = _____
e. 58 + 21 = _____ f. 25 + 63 = _____
g. 44 + 55 = _____ h. 47 + 53 = _____

Lesson 13


Julio read 6 books this week. Emi read 12 books this week.
How many fewer books did Julio read than Emi? How many
books did they read in all? How many more books does Julio
have to read so that he has read one more book than Emi?
Note: Todays problem begins with a comparison with difference
unknown problem type. Each of the succeeding questions can
help students contrast this type of question with both the put
together with result unknown problem type and the add to with
change unknown problem type.

Make Ten Addition with Partners 1.OA.6 (4 minutes)

Note: Based on the needs of the class, select a Sprint from Lesson 3s materials. There are several possible
options available.
1. Re-administer the Sprint used during the previous lesson.
3. Differentiate. Administer two different Sprints. Simply have one group do a counting activity on the
Lesson 13: Add a pair of two-digit numbers when the ones digits have a sum
greater than 10 using decomposition. 167

Make Ten Addition with Partners (4 minutes)

Materials: (S) Personal white board
Note: This fluency activity reviews how to use the Level 3 strategy of making ten to add two single-digit
numbers. Reviewing the make ten strategy prepares students for todays lesson, in which they make ten to
add two two-digit numbers.
Assign partners of equal ability.
Partners choose an addend for each other from 1 to NOTES ON
10.
MULTIPLE MEANS
On their personal white boards, students add their OF ENGAGEMENT:
numbers to 9, 8, and 7. Remind students to write the
Careful selection of pairs for
two addition sentences they learned in Module 2. collaborative work is essential to
Partners then exchange boards and check each others achieving expected outcomes. Some
work. lessons lend themselves to groupings
of students with similar skill sets, while
others work better when students are
heterogeneously grouped. Some
students benefit from the opportunity
to work independently and share with
the teacher or another pair after they
have completed the task.

Materials: (T) Chart paper, document camera (if available)
(S) Personal white board NOTES ON
MULTIPLE MEANS
Gather students in the meeting area with their materials in a
semicircle formation. OF ACTION AND
EXPRESSION:
Three sets of problems extend students double-digit addition
Students may choose how they want to
skills from Module 4. Although it may be tempting to review a solve problemswith drawings,
particular method to solve two-digit addition problems, refrain number bonds, or the arrow way.
from doing so. Instead, encourage and remind students of the Students should begin to move away
MP.5 same tools they used in Lesson 12. from drawing to the more abstract
method of problem solving. However,
After each problem, have students share their solutions. Invite
not all students are ready to abstractly
one or two students to explain their strategies for solving. They
solve problems, so support students
may redraw their work or display the work using a document wherever they are in their learning, and
camera. Select work that represents a variety of strategies, guide them as they progress.
including decomposing to get to the next ten, adding the tens
and then the ones, and adding the ones and then the tens.

Encourage students to use place value language to describe how their strategy works. Ask questions such
as, Why did you choose your method?
Problems 1 4 review work from Module 4 Lessons 26 and 27 with analogous problems now between 40 and
100.
Problems 5 12 provide a scaffold less opportunity to add pairs of two-digit numbers.
Problems 14 Problems 512
19 + 11, 59 + 11, 59 + 21 49 + 12
19 + 13, 59 + 13, 59 + 33 59 + 22
NOTES ON
18 + 15, 68 + 25 48 + 24 MULTIPLE MEANS
17 + 16, 37 + 56 54 + 38 OF ACTION AND
37 + 37 EXPRESSION:
Continue to challenge students
37 + 46 working above grade level. Change
78 + 22 some of the expressions into number
sentences with missing addends, or
33 + 67 give students some word problems to
Should students need additional support, the following dialogue solve with similar numbers.
presents a more guided approach to Problems 2 4. Problem 1
(a), (b), and (c) practice the work from yesterdays lesson to
segue into todays objective.
T: (Write 19 + 13 = ___ on the chart.) Use quick tens to show these two numbers.
Then, solve for the total. (Circulate as students work to assess students ability
to solve independently and identify common errors.)
T: 19 plus 13 equals?
S: 32.
T: Talk with your partner about how you solved the problem. Try to show your
thinking using number bonds with your number sentence. (Circulate as
students explain their solution methods and create written notation of their
methods.)
T: I heard many of you say you started with 19 and added 10. (Select a student
who used this method to show the class. Walk through the steps of breaking
apart 13 into 10 and 3. 19 + 10 is 29. Then, to add 29 + 3, the student may
have broken 3 into 1 and 2, for a total of 32, as shown to the right. If the
students written notation is appropriate, have her share her written notation.
If it is not, then model the number sentence and number bond work as the
student describes her process.)
T: 19 is so close to 20. Youre all very good at adding multiples of ten. How could
I break 13 to make the next ten and then add the rest? How much more does
19 need to make 20?
S: 1 more!

T: I would break 13 into 1 and? (Begin written notation to show the bond below 13.)
S: 12.
T: Our first number sentence would be 19 + 1 is?
S: 20.
T: Then, we would have?
S: 20 + 12 = 32.
Repeat the process with the analogous problem of
59 + 13 and then with 59 + 33. When moving on to
Problems 3 and 4, consider asking students to take on
more of the demonstrations and explanations.


when the ones digits have a sum greater than 10 using
decomposition.
the lesson.
Which problem was the easiest for you to
solve? What made it easy for you?
Find two problems in your Problem Set that
are related in some way. Explain your thinking.
How is Make Ten Addition from todays
Fluency Practice related to some of the work
you did on your Problem Set?


effectively for future lessons. The questions may be
read aloud to the students.

Name Date
1. Solve and show your work.
a. 79 + 12 = _______ b. 59 + 32 = _______
c. 38 + 45 = _______ d. 36 + 47 = _______
e. 48 + 45 = _______ f. 57 + 34 = _______

a. 24 + 37 = _______ b. 48 + 45 = _______
c. 29 + 67 = _______ d. 48 + 34 = _______
e. 69 + 27 = _______ f. 78 + 17 = _______

Name Date
Solve and show your work.
a. 49 + 37 = _______ b. 56 + 38 = _______

Name Date
a. 15 + 26 = _______ b. 46 + 49 = _______ c. 28 + 54 = _______
d. 69 + 13 = _______ e. 69 + 23 = _______ f. 69 + 19 = _______
g. 49 + 43 = _______ h. 57 + 36 = _______ i. 68 + 23 = _______

a. 34 + 47 = _______ b. 38 + 45 = _______ c. 68 + 23 = _______
d. 39 + 57 = _______ e. 38 + 44 = _______ f. 17 + 76 = _______
g. 68 + 24 = _______ h. 18 + 77 = _______ i. 14 + 67 = _______

Lesson 14

There are 12 chairs at the lunch table and 15 students. How many
more chairs are needed so that every student has a chair?
Note: Todays problem is a comparison with difference unknown
problem type. Students who have struggled with comparison
problems may successfully solve this common real-life problem.
Before moving on to the Fluency Practice, have students briefly discuss
the solution.

Add Tens 1.NBT.4 (3 minutes)
Take Out Ones 1.OA.6, 1.NBT.4 (5 minutes)


Add Tens (3 minutes)

Materials: (S) Personal white board, die per pair of students
Note: This fluency activity reviews adding multiples of 10 to two-digit numbers.

Partner A writes or draws a number (with quick tens and ones) between 10 and 40 (e.g., 25).
Partner B rolls the die to determine the number of tens to add (e.g., if he rolls 5, add 5 tens).
Both partners write the number sentence on their personal white boards and check each others
work (e.g., 25 + 50 = 75).
Take Out Ones (5 minutes)

Note: Taking out some ones from a two-digit number strengthens students ability to apply
the make ten strategy when adding two two-digit numbers.
Give students a sequence of related numbers at a time, and have them write number bonds
on their personal white boards. Challenge early finishers to think of additional related number
bonds for each sequence. Follow the suggested sequence:
Take out 1: 8, 18, 28; 6, 56, 86.
Take out 2: 5, 15, 25; 7, 37, 97.
Take out 3: 6, 36, 76; 9, 69, 99, 109.
Take out 4: 8, 48, 88, 108; 7, 77, 107, 117.
Concept Development (32 minutes) NOTES ON

MULTIPLE MEANS
Materials: (T) Chart paper, document camera if available OF ACTION AND
(S) Personal white board EXPRESSION:
Students may choose how they want to
Begin todays lesson with students at their desks or tables with
solve problemswith drawings,
their personal white boards. number bonds, or the arrow way.
Similar to the last two days, todays lesson provides Students should begin to move away
opportunities for students to practice solving two-digit addition from drawing to the more abstract
problems. methods of problem solving. However,
not all students are ready, so support
Today, however, in each set, a string of problems is related (e.g., students wherever they are in their
56 + 21, 56 + 24, and 56 + 27). For students who need learning, and guide them as they
additional support, the movement through the problems from progress.
simple to complex can help them choose a solution strategy.
Challenge students who are becoming proficient at solving two-digit addition problems to identify the
relationship between each problem and create other strings that would exemplify the same set of
relationships. Use their problems in the class if possible.

As in Lessons 12 and 13, invite students to share their methods for solving using place value language to
explain why they chose to solve using these methods.
Problems 1 6 use easier combinations of ones as they create sums in the ones place that are equal to or
greater than 10.
Problems 7 12 use combinations of ones that are typically more
challenging for students.
Problems 16 Problems 712 NOTES ON
MULTIPLE MEANS
65 + 15 56 + 28
OF ACTION AND
65 + 16 46 + 28 EXPRESSION:
65 + 19 38 + 56 Continue to challenge students
working above grade level. Change
48 + 33 37 + 57 some of the expressions into number
48 + 43 37 + 47 sentences with missing addends, or
give students some word problems to
38 + 62 45 + 37 solve with similar numbers.
Below are some of the various methods and explanations that

students might share:
I added 20 to 46 first. I made a ten first. I added the 4 tens to

2 tens first.



when the ones digits have a sum greater than 10 using
decomposition.
the lesson.
Look at Problem 1 (a) and (b). How can solving
Problem 1(a) help you solve Problem 1(b)?
Look at Problem 2 (g) and (h). How are they
related? How could solving one help you solve
the other?
Think about Take Out Ones in our Fluency
Practice today. How did it help you when you
were solving the more challenging problems?

effectively for future lessons. The questions may be
read aloud to the students.

Name Date
a. 48 + 21 = ____ b. 48 + 22 = ____
c. 39 + 43 = ____ d. 48 + 34 = ____
e. 77 + 14 = ____ f. 67 + 27 = ____
g. 58 + 37 = ____ h. 68 + 29 = ____

a. 39 + 31 = ____ b. 58 + 23 = ____
c. 77 + 23 = ____ d. 69 + 26 = ____
e. 68 + 25 = ____ f. 45 + 37 = ____
g. 59 + 39 = ____ h. 58 + 38 = ____

Name Date
Solve and show your work.
a. 47 + 42 = ____ b. 78 + 22 = ____
c. 56 + 38 = ____

Name Date
a. 68 + 21 = ____ b. 59 + 32 = ____
c. 39 + 44 = ____ d. 58 + 36 = ____
e. 76 + 17 = ____ f. 68 + 26 = ____
g. 56 + 39 = ____ h. 58 + 29 = ____

a. 39 + 41 = ____ b. 48 + 43 = ____
c. 87 + 13 = ____ d. 59 + 25 = ____
e. 65 + 27 = ____ f. 27 + 67 = ____
g. 49 + 39 = ____ h. 38 + 58 = ____

Lesson 15
sum greater than 10 with drawing. Record the total below.

There are 20 students in class. Nine students put away their backpacks.
How many more students still need to put away their backpacks?
Note: This is a take apart with addend unknown problem type that is
set in a typical classroom context. Take note of students independent
choices to solve using addition or subtraction number sentences.

Take Out Ones 1.OA.6, 1.NBT.4 (5 minutes)

After students complete todays Practice Sets, ask them to stand if they tried a new level today or improved
their scores from the previous day. Consider having students clap once for each person standing to celebrate
improvement.
greater than 10 with drawing. Record the total below. 186

Take Out Ones (5 minutes)

Note: Taking out some ones from a two-digit number strengthens students ability to apply the make ten
strategy when adding two two-digit numbers.
Repeat from the previous lesson. Give students a sequence of
related numbers, and have them write number bonds on their
personal white boards. Challenge early finishers to think of
additional related number bonds for each sequence. Follow the
suggested sequence:
Take out 1: 2, 42, 72; 5, 55, 85.
Take out 2: 7, 47, 67; 9, 69, 99.
Take out 3: 8, 58, 78; 7, 67, 97, 107.
Take out 4: 6, 46, 86, 106; 9, 79, 109, 119.
Materials: (T) 10 ten-sticks (5 red, 5 yellow) (S) 5 ten-sticks, personal white board, place value chart
(Lesson 3 Template 2)
Students sit in the meeting area with their materials in a semicircle formation.
T: (Write 59 + 34 = ___.) I want to show this problem with the ten-sticks. What is the total number of
tens in the first addend?
S: 5 tens.
T: (Project 5 ten-sticks onto the board.) We have 5 tens and how many
more ones?
S: 9 ones.
T: (Project 9 cubes arranged in a 5-group formation, as
shown to the right.)
T: How many tens are in 34? NOTES ON
S: 3 tens. MULTIPLE MEANS
T: Will we be adding 3 tens to the ones or to the tens? OF REPRESENTATION:
S: To the tens. Support students who may have
T: (Vertically align 3 ten-sticks to the 5 ten-sticks.) 34 is difficulty lining up their numbers to add
3 tens and how many more ones? vertically. These students may benefit
from more concrete or pictorial
S: 4 ones. supports while adding. Have them use
T: We should add them to? the place value chart more regularly
S: The ones! until they are able to line up the digits
independently.

T:
(Vertically align 4 ones to 9 ones as shown.) Our cubes are arranged, so we are ready to add. What
is 9 ones and 4 ones? Turn and talk to your partner about what I can do with the ones.
S: 13 ones. 9 needs 1 more to make ten. Take 1 from the 4. Now we have 10 and 3.
T: (Group the 9 and 1 cube on the board.) Now that we made a new ten, how many ones do we still
have?
S: 3 ones.
T: (Write 3 in the ones place.) How many tens do we have now? Explain your
thinking to your partner.
S: 9 tens. 5 tens and 3 tens is 8 tens. We also made a new ten when we
added 9 and 4, so that makes 9 tens altogether.
T: (Write 9 in the tens place.) So, what is 59 + 34? Say the
number sentence.
S: 59 + 34 = 93.
Repeat the process using the following sequence: NOTES ON
MULTIPLE MEANS
49 + 35 OF REPRESENTATION:
43 + 36 Students demonstrate a true
38 + 47 understanding of math concepts when
17 + 65 they make connections and apply them
in a variety of situations. By scaffolding
38 + 52 questions, it is possible to guide
38 + 62 connections, analysis, and mastery in
students.
Beginning at 17 + 65, have students make quick ten drawings to
show their work.
T: (Write 17 + 65 = ___.) Make a quick ten drawing to show the first addend.
S: (Draw 1 quick ten and 7 ones.)
T: (Circulate and make sure the students arrange their 7 circles in 5-groups.)
T: Lets get ready to draw 65. Where should we draw the 6 quick tens?
S: Under the tens, right below the 1 ten from 17.
T: Where should we draw the 5 ones?
S: Under the ones, right below the 7 ones from 17.
T: Draw 65 and solve. (Circulate and support students as needed.)


Lesson Objective: Add a pair of two-digit numbers when

the ones digits have a sum greater than 10 with drawing.
Record the total below.
Set. They should check work by comparing answers with
a partner before going over answers as a class. Look for
lesson.
Look at Problem 2 (c), (d), and (e). How can
they have the same answer but different
numbers?
Look at Problem 1 (b) or (d). Why is it more
efficient to add the ones first instead of the
tens?
How does lining up the ones and tens help us
with adding?
How is lining up the ones and tens similar to
and different from using the make ten strategy
to add?
Which is easier for you? Adding by lining up
our ones and tens or using the number bonds?
Explain your thinking.
How did todays fluency activity help you solve
todays addition problems?


Name Date
1. Solve using quick tens and ones drawings. Remember to line up your tens with tens
and ones with ones. Write the total below your drawing.
a. 29 + 42 = ____ b. 39 + 54 = ____
c. 41 + 38 = ____ d. 58 + 24 = ____
e. 47 + 46 = ____ f. 48 + 29 = ____

2. Solve using quick tens and ones. Remember to line up your tens with tens and ones
with ones. Write the total below your drawing.
a. 49 + 22 = ____ b. 38 + 62 = ____
c. 59 + 23 = ____ d. 68 + 14 = ____
e. 46 + 36 = ____ f. 69 + 26 = ____

Name Date
Solve using quick tens and ones drawings. Remember to line up your drawings and write
the total below your drawing.
a. 49 + 34 = ____ b. 57 + 36 = ____

Name Date
1. Solve using quick tens and ones drawings. Remember to line up your
tens with tens and ones with ones. Write the total below your drawing.
a. 39 + 42 = ____ b. 48 + 36 = ____
c. 31 + 48 = ____ d. 47 + 34 = ____
e. 57 + 39 = ____ f. 58 + 27 = ____

2. Solve using quick tens and ones. Remember to line up your tens with tens and ones
with ones. Write the total below your drawing.
a. 59 + 25 = ____ b. 48 + 42 = ____
c. 39 + 53 = ____ d. 78 + 14 = ____
e. 57 + 25 = ____ f. 69 + 27 = ____

Lesson 16

Fifteen students ordered pizza for lunch. Seven students brought

their lunch from home. How many fewer students brought their
lunch from home than ordered lunch?
Note: Todays Application Problem is a compare with difference
unknown problem type. Consider altering the meal choice to match
the schools lunch menu for the day.


Note: Choose a Sprint based on the needs of the class.

greater than 10 with drawing. Record the new ten below. 195


Materials: (T) 4 dimes, 10 pennies, can NOTES ON
MULTIPLE MEANS
Note: In this activity, students practice adding and subtracting OF ENGAGEMENT:
ones and tens within 100. After playing Coin Drop with pennies
T: (Hold up a penny.) Name my coin. and then dimes, mix pennies and
dimes so that students have to add
S: A penny. based on the changing value of the
T: How much is it worth? coin. This challenges students and
S: 1 cent. keeps them listening for what is
coming.
T: Listen carefully as I drop coins in my can. Count along
in your minds.
Drop in some pennies, and ask how much money is in the can. Take out some pennies, and show them. Ask
how much money is still in the can. Continue adding and subtracting pennies for a minute. Then, repeat the
activity with dimes. For the final minute, begin with some pennies in the can, and add and subtract dimes.
Materials: (T) Chart paper (S) Personal white board, recording tens and ones (Template)

T: (Write 39 + 26 = ___ on the board.) On your personal
white board, make a quick ten drawing to solve.
S: (Solve as the teacher circulates and selects one student NOTES ON
to share her solution with the class.) MULTIPLE MEANS
OF ACTION AND
T: (Choose a student, Student 1, to model the drawing on
the board.) As Student 1 draws and explains what she EXPRESSION:
did, Im going to stop her after every step to show how Giving students an opportunity to share
we can record using just numbers. their thinking allows students to
evaluate their process and practice.
S1: (Draws 39.) I drew 3 tens and 9 ones. English language learners also benefit
T: Stop! She made 3 tens, so I write 3 in the tens place. from hearing other students explain
She made 9 ones, so I write the 9 in the? their thinking.
S: Ones place!
T: (Write 39.)
S1: (Draws 26 vertically aligned to 39.) I drew 2 tens and 6 ones right below so I can add tens to tens
and ones to ones.
T: Stop! Watch me as I match exactly what Student 1 did with her drawing. (Write 26.) Im adding the
2 tens to the 3 tens, 6 ones to the 9 ones, just like the picture. (Draw the equal sign.)
S1: Then, I added the ones together. 9 needs 1 from 6 to get to 10. (Frames 10.) 10 and 5 is 15.

T: Stop! Student 1 made 15 by adding 9 and 6. (Point to

the digits in the ones place.) Thats 1 ten 5 ones.
Watch where I record that new ten. (Record the new
ten below the second addend in the tens place as
shown to the right.) I didnt write the 1 ten where the
answer goes yet because I have more tens to add later.
15 is 1 ten and?
S: 5 ones.
T: (Write 5 in the ones place.)
S1: Then, I added 3 tens and 2 tens plus the 1 ten I made
when I added 9 and 6. Thats 6 tens. (Writes 6 in the
tens place.)
T: Ah, ha! So, she added 3 tens and 2 tens (point to the NOTES ON
digits 3 and 2) plus this new ten we wrote in from 15 MULTIPLE MEANS
when we added the ones. So 3 tens + 2 tens + 1 ten OF ACTION AND
is?
EXPRESSION:
S: 6 tens. Continue to challenge students
T: So, what is 39 + 26? Say the number sentence. working above grade level. Encourage
S: 39 + 26 = 65. students to write a creative word
problem to match one of the number
T: Lets try some more. sentences they solved today.
Continue with the following process using the suggested
sequence as the students are ready:
39 + 36, 59 + 37, 28 + 43, 47 + 35, 26 + 67.
Have another student model the quick ten
drawings as the teacher represents the drawings
with numbers.
MP.4 The teacher draws the quick ten drawings, and
students represent the drawings with just
numbers on the place value chart.
Students make the quick ten drawings and
represent them with just numbers side by side.



when the ones digits have a sum greater than 10 with
drawing. Record the new ten below.
the lesson.
Look at page 1 of your Problem Set. What is
different about Problem 1(d) compared to the
others?
Look at Problem 1(f). Why is there a zero in the
ones place in the answer when we added some
ones together in the problem?
What new math notation did we use today to communicate how we added precisely?
Do you prefer to add by lining up your tens and ones or by using the number bond to add?


Name Date
1. Solve using quick tens and ones drawings. Remember to line up your drawings and
rewrite the number sentence vertically.
a. 29 + 43 = ____ b. 34 + 49 = ____
c. 45 + 39 = ____ d. 54 + 25 = ____
e. 47 + 36 = ____ f. 54 + 46 = ____

2. Solve using quick tens and ones. Remember to line up your drawings and rewrite the
number sentence vertically.
a. 39 + 24 = ____ b. 58 + 36 = ____
c. 55 + 37 = ____ d. 59 + 36 = ____
e. 37 + 58 = ____ f. 68 + 29 = ____

Name Date
Solve using quick tens and ones. Remember to line up your drawings and rewrite the
a. 49 + 26 = ____ b. 58 + 37 = ____
c. 55 + 37 = ____ d. 69 + 26 = ____

Name Date
1. Solve using quick tens and ones drawings. Remember to line up

your drawings and rewrite the number sentence vertically.
a. 39 + 45 = ____ b. 64 + 28 = ____
c. 47 + 38 = ____ d. 53 + 27 = ____
e. 38 + 48 = ____ f. 53 + 45 = ____

2. Solve using quick tens and ones. Remember to line up your drawings and rewrite the
a. 79 + 14 = ____ b. 28 + 47 = ____
c. 58 + 33 = ____ d. 19 + 66 = ____
e. 39 + 59 = ____ f. 49 + 48 = ____

recording tens and ones

Lesson 17

Rose saw 14 monkeys at the zoo. She saw 5 fewer monkeys than foxes.
How many foxes did Rose see?
Note: Todays problem is a comparison with larger unknown problem
type where fewer suggests the wrong operation. Students should be
exposed to these problems, but mastery is not expected until the end of
Grade 2.

Analogous Addition Sentences 1.OA.6, 1.NBT.4 (3 minutes)

options available.
1. Re-administer the Sprint from the day before.

Analogous Addition Sentences (3 minutes)

Note: This fluency activity encourages students to use sums within 10 to solve more challenging problems.
T: Say the number sentence with the answer. 5 + 2.
S: 5 + 2 = 7.
T: 45 + 2.
S: 45 + 2 = 47.
T: 42 + 5.
S: 42 + 5 = 47.
T: 5 + 42.
S: 5 + 42 = 47.
Continue with the following suggested sequence:
4+3 6+3 5+4
84 + 3 76 + 3 95 + 4
83 + 4 73 + 6 94 + 5
4 + 83 6 + 73 5 + 94
Materials: (T) Chart paper (S) Personal white board, recording tens and ones (Lesson 16 Template)
(optional), numeral cards (Lesson 3 Fluency Template)
Students sit at their tables with their personal white boards.

This Concept Development can be used to solidify the learning acquired in Lessons 15 and 16. Three sets of
problems have been provided for students who are ready to extend their double-digit addition skills. The
teaching sequence from Lesson 16 may be used to guide instruction. Students should be encouraged to solve
by using quick ten drawings as well as the standard algorithm. Encourage students to use place value
language to describe strategies for solving.
Problems 14 Problems 58 Problems 912
25 + 13 49 + 25 55 + 39
NOTES ON
29 + 13 58 + 32 36 + 57
MULTIPLE MEANS
39 + 23 67 + 28 15 + 78 OF ENGAGEMENT:
38 + 25 67 + 26 27 + 73 Appropriate scaffolds help all students
feel successful. As students work,
If time allows, have student pairs use numeral cards to generate observe closely to determine if any
two-digit addition problems to solve with their partners. This would benefit from one-on-one
gives the teacher an opportunity to work in a small group with problem-solving assistance.
students who need extra support.

Create a tens pile (digits 0 4) and a ones pile (digits 5 9)

using numeral cards from both players, and put them
facedown.
Put the place value chart templates between the partners,
and add an addition sign in between the charts.
Partner A creates the first addend by drawing a card from the
tens pile and ones pile and places them in the first place
value chart.
Partner B creates the second addend in the same way,
placing them in the second place value chart.
Each student solves the problem with a quick ten
drawing and the standard algorithm on his personal
white board. NOTES ON
MULTIPLE MEANS
Problem Set (10 minutes) OF ACTION AND
EXPRESSION:
Students should do their personal best to complete the Problem
Continue to challenge students who
Set within the allotted 10 minutes. For some classes, it may be
are working above grade level. After
appropriate to modify the assignment by specifying which they have completed the Problem Set,
problems they work on first. Some problems do not specify a encourage them to write a word
method for solving. Students should solve these problems using problem adding a pair of two-digit
the RDW approach used for Application Problems. numbers. Have students who write a
word problem trade papers to solve
each others problem.
Lesson Objective: Add a pair of two-digit numbers when

the ones digits have a sum greater than 10 with drawing.
Record the new ten below.
lesson.
How can solving Problem 1(b) help you solve
Problem 1(c)?

Look at your quick ten drawing for Problem 2(d).

How did you make a new ten? Show another
way to make a new ten.
Look at Problems 1(a) and 2(a) with a partner.
How are these problems related? How can
solving Problem 1(a) help you solve Problem
2(a)? Think of another problem you could solve
that is related to Problems 1(a) and 2(a).
Look at Problem 1 (c) and (d). How are these
problems alike? Why is the total of 47 and 42 a
number in the 80s and the total of 47 and 47 is a
number in the 90s?
Which addition strategy do you prefer? Explain
your thinking.
How did the Analogous Addition Sentences help
you with addition during todays lesson?


Name Date
1. Solve using quick tens and ones drawings. Remember to line up your tens and ones
and rewrite the number sentence vertically.
a. 39 + 52 = ____ b. 48 + 42 = ____
c. 47 + 42 = ____ d. 47 + 47 = ____
e. 68 + 17 = ____ f. 68 + 29 = ____

a. 39 + 32 = ____ b. 48 + 31 = ____
c. 43 + 49 = ____ d. 57 + 38 = ____
e. 61 + 39 = ____ f. 68 + 25 = ____

Name Date
Solve using quick tens and ones drawings. Remember to line up your tens and ones and
rewrite the number sentence vertically.
a. 39 + 47 = ____ b. 58 + 32 = ____
c. 49 + 44 = ____ d. 58 + 39 = ____

Name Date
a. 49 + 33 = ____ b. 68 + 32 = ____
c. 36 + 43 = ____ d. 27 + 67 = ____
e. 78 + 17 = ____ f. 69 + 28 = ____

a. 29 + 52 = ____ b. 58 + 31 = ____
c. 73 + 26 = ____ d. 67 + 28 = ____
e. 41 + 59 = ____ f. 48 + 45 = ____

1
GRADE
GRADE 1 MODULE 6
Topic D
Varied Place Value Strategies for
Addition to 100
1.NBT.4
Focus Standard: 1.NBT.4 Add within 100, including adding a two-digit number and a one-digit number, and
adding a two-digit number and a multiple of 10, using concrete models or drawings and
During Topic D, students discuss and compare the various place value strategies they use when adding to 100
(1.NBT.4). Students have the opportunity to explain their thinking and better understand the strategies
based on the examples and explanations of peers.
Lesson 18 has students adding a pair of two-digit numbers, such as 36 + 57, in more than one way, explaining
the similarities and differences in the methods. Students recognize that they can achieve the same accurate
sum through the varied strategies, as they decompose and recompose the numbers, attending to the tens
and ones.
Students share their preferred strategies in Lesson 19, explaining the reason they choose to use a particular
strategy for a particular set of addends. For instance, when adding 39 + 43, one student may prefer to use
the make ten strategy, decomposing 43 into 1 and 42, because adding 40 + 42 is an easy problem for her.
Another student may prefer vertically aligning the numbers to ensure that he is adding ones with ones and
then tens with tens. Students discuss questions such as, In which number bonds do you see an easier
problem to solve? Is there another way to solve this problem? How are [the selected students] methods
different from or the same as your partners? What is a compliment you would like to give [him or her]?
Topic D: Varied Place Value Strategies for Addition to 100

214

NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Topic D 1 6
A Teaching Sequence Toward Mastery of Varied Place Value Strategies for Addition to 100
Objective 1: Add a pair of two-digit numbers with varied sums in the ones, and compare the results of
different recording methods.
(Lesson 18)
Objective 2: Solve and share strategies for adding two-digit numbers with varied sums.
(Lesson 19)
Topic D: Varied Place Value Strategies for Addition to 100

215

Lesson 18
Objective: Add a pair of two-digit numbers with varied sums in the ones,
and compare the results of different recording methods.

Standards Check: Commutative Property 1.OA.3, 1.OA7 (5 minutes)

Standards Check: Subtraction as Unknown Addend 1.OA.4 (8 minutes)
Standards Check: Commutative Property (5 minutes)

Materials: (S) Pair of dice, personal white board
Note: In the remaining lessons, there are a variety of fluency activities that can be used to monitor students
mastery of grade level standards. Take note of any students who may need additional support or particular
standards-based activities that may be useful to include in summer practice.
This activity reviews the commutative property of addition (e.g., if 6 + 3 = 9 is known,
then 3 + 6 = 9 is also known) (1.OA.3) and requires students to understand the meaning
of the equal sign (1.OA.7).
Assign partners.
Both partners roll a die and then write four addition sentences using the rolled
numbers as addends.
Partners check each others work.
Standards Check: Subtraction as Unknown Addend (8 minutes)

Materials: (S) Pattern sheet list A or B (Fluency Template)
Note: This activity provides review with converting subtraction expressions to unknown addend equations.
Assign partners of equal ability, and give one partner List A and the other List B.
Lesson 18: Add a pair of two-digit numbers with varied sums in the ones, and
compare the results of different recording methods. 216

Students convert the subtraction expressions on their lists to addition equations with unknown
addends (e.g., for 10 9, the student would write 9 + ___ = 10).
Partners exchange lists and solve.
A farmer counted 12 bunnies in their cages in the morning. In the

afternoon, he only counted 4 bunnies in their cages. How many
bunnies disappeared from their cages?
Note: Todays problem is a take away with change unknown
problem type. As Topic F, which focuses on varied problem types,
approaches, begin to take note of students strengths and
weaknesses for specific problem types.
Materials: (T) Student work samples (Template), projector (S) Personal white board
Have students sit at their tables or in the meeting area with their personal boards.
T: (Write 58 + 37 on the board.) Solve this problem. (Pause while students work. Quietly post a
second problem for early finishers.)
T: The answer is ?
S: 95.
T: Take a moment to discuss your strategy and/or correct your work with your partner.
T: (Project work from Student A and Student B.) Lets compare Student As work to Student Bs work.
What is the same, and what is different about their solution strategies? Turn and talk to your
partner.
S: They both used number bonds. Both students broke apart 37. They both used tens to solve.
T: I have two labels. Read them to me.
S: Make the Next Ten. Count On by Tens First.

T: Talk to your partner. Which label best describes the solution strategy of each student? Explain why.
S: Student A made the next ten first. Student A broke 37 into 2 and 35 so he could add 2 and 58 to
make 60. Student B counted on by tens. Thats why he broke apart 37 into 30 and 7. 58 and 30 is
88. Student B added the tens first. I dont think he counted on by tens, but I guess that label fits
the best.
T: (Label Student As work Make the Next Ten. Label Student Bs work Count On by Tens First.)
T: Can both students work be correct even though they used tens in different ways?
S: Yes!
T: What is a compliment you can give to each of these
students? NOTES ON
MULTIPLE MEANS
S: They drew correct number bonds. Student A
OF REPRESENTATION:
showed how she made the next ten from 58. You can
see that in the number bond and in the first addition Facilitate student discussions to
MP.3 provide opportunities for
sentence. Student B did a good job by breaking
comprehension. Guide students to
apart the tens from 37 so he could add 3 tens to 58
recognize strategies that can make
first.
math easier, for example, breaking a
T: What are some ways they could improve their work? larger number into number bonds as
S: Student B could write an addition sentence that well as looking for patterns and
showed how he got 88. But maybe he did that in his structures in their work.
head.
T: (Project Student Cs work.) How did Student C solve
58 + 37? Turn and talk to your partner.
S: He drew quick tens and ones by lining up the tens to
tens and the ones to ones. Then, he showed exactly
how he added using just the numbers.
T: (Label the work The Quick Ten DrawingAdding Tens
to Tens and Ones to Ones.)
T: This students answer is 85, instead of 95 like we got.
What happened? Can we find the error in his work?
S: When he added the ones together, he
made the next ten with 8 and 2 from
the 7. But when he added the tens, he
forgot about the next ten! You can
see that when he used just the
numbers. He didnt remember the
next ten. Its easier to remember a
next ten when you write it in the tens
place. There should be a total of 9
tens, not 8 tens. The answer is 9 tens
5 ones. 95.
T: Discuss with your partner. What are some ways this student can improve his work?
S: He can work more carefully and realize that he made the next ten. He can record the next ten.
Then, he can catch his mistake. The student can look at his picture to check his work.

T: Yes! It is important to record when you have made the next ten. It helps to keep track of all of your
thinking.
T: Rewrite this students work on your board, solving it correctly. When youre finished, check your
work with your partner.
S: (Work with partners to solve using quick ten drawings.)
T: (As students finish, choose a pair of students to show their work on the board as the new work for
Student C.)
T: (Project Student Ds work.) Lets compare Student Ds work to Student Cs new work. What
similarities and differences do you notice? Turn and talk to your partner.
S: They look different because Student D used number bonds and three addition sentences to solve the
problem. But our new work for Student C shows quick ten drawings with lined up numbers to add
tens with tens and ones with ones. They both added ones to ones and then tens to tens! They
both added 8 and 7 and got 15. Then, they added 5 tens and 3 tens to get 8 tens. Then, they both
added the next ten and got 95.
T: (Write 47 + 36 on the board.) Solve a new problem. You may use any method to solve, but you must
show your work.
Have students swap boards with their partner and discuss the following:
How did your partner show her solution?
How was her work different from your work? NOTES ON
How was your work the same? MULTIPLE MEANS
Give your partner a compliment on her work. OF ENGAGEMENT:
Give a suggestion for how she could improve her work. Appropriate scaffolds help all students
feel successful. As students are
Project three or four work samples from the class, showing each working, observe closely to determine
of the methods: vertical alignment, make the next ten, count if any would benefit from one-on-one
on by tens, and add ones to ones and then tens to tens using problem-solving assistance.
number bonds.
T: How is the student work shown different from your partners work?
If time allows, have students solve 26 + 65, and then share another set of student work from the class.


Lesson Objective: Add a pair of two-digit numbers with varied sums in the ones, and compare the results of
different recording methods.
lesson.
Look at Problem 2. Which strategy, count on by
tens first or make the next ten first, would you
use to solve? Explain your choice.
Why didnt most of us use the make the next ten
strategy when solving Problem 1?
The make the next ten strategy and another
strategy, too, can be used for Problem 1. Explain
to your partner why these number sentences are
correct. (Write 74 + 21 = 80 + 15, 74 + 21 = 65 +
30, and 74 + 21 = 75 + 20.)
How can solving Problem 5 help you solve
Problem 6?
Which strategy do you find yourself using the most? Why do you prefer that strategy?


Name Date
Use any method you prefer to solve the problems below.
1. 2.
74 + 21 = _____ 79 + 21 = _____
3. 4.
46 + 34 = _____ 58 + 34 = _____
5. 6.
35 + 14 = _____ 35 + 18 = _____

Name Date
Circle the work that is correct.

In the extra space, correct the mistake in the other solution using the same solution
strategy the student tried to use.

Name Date
Use any method you prefer to solve the problems below.
1. 2.
61 + 15 = _____ 16 + 51 = _____
3. 4.
37 + 45 = _____ 27 + 46 = _____
5. 6.
58 + 27 = _____ 38 + 48 = _____

Name Name
Partner Partner
Example Example
Step 1: Rewrite 4 1 as 1 + ___ = 4. Step 1: Rewrite 4 1 as 1 + ___ = 4.
Step 2: Exchange papers and solve. Step 2: Exchange papers and solve.
List A List B
1. 10 9 1. 10 - 8
2. 10 8 2. 10 7
3. 98 3. 87
4. 96 4. 86
5. 86 5. 96
6. 74 6. 76
7. 75 7. 75
8. 8-5 8. 7-4
9. 95 9. 85
10. 9-6 10. 6-4
pattern sheet list A or B

student work samples

Lesson 19
Objective: Solve and share strategies for adding two-digit numbers with
varied sums.


Standards Check: True or False Number Sentences 1.OA.7 (8 minutes)

score from the previous day. Consider having students clap for each person standing to celebrate
improvement.
Standards Check: True or False Number Sentences (8 minutes)

Note: Use professional judgment to determine whether students would benefit more from repeating the
previous standards check or moving on to this one. Todays standards check reviews the meaning of the
equal sign and requires students to determine if addition and subtraction equations are true or false.
T: (Write 5 = 1 + 4.) Whats 1 + 4?
S: 5
Lesson 19: Solve and share strategies for adding two-digit numbers with varied
sums. 226

T: (Write 5 = 5 directly underneath 5 = 1 + 4.) Is 5 = 1 + 4 true or false?

S: True.
T: Why?
S: Because 5 is equal to 5. Because 5 is the same as 5.
T: Now, you do the same. Rename the side of the number sentence with a plus or minus symbol as one
number.
T: (Write 7 = 3 + 5.)
S: (Write 7 = 8.)
T: Show me your boards. (Pause to see.) Is 7 = 3 + 5 true or false?
S: False.
T: Why?
S: Because 7 is not the same as 8. Because 7 doesnt equal 8.
T/S: (Draw a line through the equal sign to show 5 and )
As time permits, continue with the following suggested sequence:
a. 7=2+5 d. 72=4 g. 6+1=5+2 j. 85=94
b. 3+6=9 e. 3=85 h. 4+3=7+1 k. 86=2+4
c. 8=2+7 f. 3=97 i. 84=62 l. 4+5=93
Ben had 16 baseball cards before a card show. After the card show,
he had 20 baseball cards. How many cards were added to Bens
collection?
Note: Todays problem is an add to with change unknown problem
type. As Topic F, which focuses on varied problem types,
approaches, begin to take note of students strengths and
weaknesses for specific problem types.

NOTES ON
Materials: (T) Projector (S) Personal white board
MULTIPLE MEANS
Students sit at their tables next to their partners with personal OF ACTION AND
boards. EXPRESSION:
Giving students an opportunity to
T: Solve 39 + 43 using any strategy weve learned so far.
share their thinking allows them to
Be ready to explain why you chose the strategy.
evaluate their process and practice.
(Circulate and note the types of strategies being used.) English language learners also benefit
S: (Solve.) from hearing others explain their
thinking.
sums. 227

T: Turn and talk to your partner, and share your work. Explain to your partner why you chose that
particular strategy. What similarities and differences do you notice between your work and your
partners?
S: (Explain and compare strategies.)
T: (While student pairs share their work, ask two or three students to come up and write their work on
the board. Be sure to include students who solved using different strategies.)
T: Lets hear how our friends solved 39 + 43 and why they chose to use their particular strategy.
S: (Make the next ten strategy.) I know that 39 is really close to 40, so I took 1 from 43. I saw it as
40 + 42. Thats 82.
MP.5 (Vertical alignment.) Its quick and easy for me to add 9 and 3 and 3 tens and 4 tens. I can see which
digits I need to add more clearly when I line up the tens to tens and ones to ones.
(Standard algorithm.) I can line up my tens and ones without using drawings.
(Adding on tens first.) I am really good at adding tens onto any number. 39 and 40 is 79. Then, I
added 3 to get 82.
(Compensation.) I thought of it a different way, like a balance. 39 + 43. Add one to 39 and subtract
one from 43, so its 40 + 42.
As each student explains the work and shares the reasons for his or her strategy choice, have students discuss
questions such as the ones listed below:
Is there another way to solve this problem?
How does the number bond make it easier to add the parts?
How is Student As strategy different or the same as
your partners?
When do you think is the best time to use the make NOTES ON
ten strategy? MULTIPLE MEANS
What compliment can you give him? OF ACTION AND
EXPRESSION:
What advice can you give him to make the work
better? Continue to challenge students
working above grade level. After they
Repeat the process possibly using the following have completed the Problem Set,
suggested sequence: encourage them to write a word
66 + 29 problem to match one of the number
sentences. Have students who write
56 + 35
word problems trade papers and try to
18 + 78 find which number sentence the word
34 + 47 problem matches.

sums. 228

Lesson Objective: Solve and share strategies for adding

two-digit numbers with varied sums.
lesson.
How can solving Problem 1 help you solve
Problem 2?
Explain how Problems 3 and 4 are related.
Can you see that they would have the same sum
without calculating the sum?
Which strategy do you use the most? Why?
Do you study the numbers and choose a specific
strategy that works better with those numbers,
or do you always use the same strategy? Use an
example from your Problem Set to explain your
reasoning.
Today, we changed our number sentences to be
very simple. We changed 5 + 3 = 7 to 8 = 7. We
changed 4 = 3 + 1 to 4 = 4. How did that help you
see if the number sentences were true or false?

sums. 229

Name Date
Use the strategy you prefer to solve the problems below.
1. 2.
43 + 21 = _____ 43 + 41 = _____
3. 4.
62 + 38 = _____ 52 + 48 = _____
5. 6.
75 + 14 = _____ 75 + 16 = _____
sums. 230

7. 8.
29 + 54 = _____ 27 + 54 = _____
9. 10.
38 + 23 = _____ 58 + 36 = _____
11. 12.
49 + 19 = _____ 28 + 69 = _____
sums. 231

Name Date
a. b.
24 + 38 = _____ 24 + 48 = _____
sums. 232

Name Date
1. 2.
53 + 22 = _____ 23 + 52 = _____
3. 4.
76 + 14 = _____ 76 + 16 = _____
5. 6.
55 + 35 = _____ 54 + 46 = _____
sums. 233

7. 8.
49 + 25 = _____ 49 + 45 = _____
9. 10.
37 + 37 = _____ 37 + 57 = _____
11. 12.
24 + 48 = _____ 26 + 68 = _____
sums. 234

NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Mid-Module Assessment Task 1 6
Name Date
1. Use the RDW process to solve the following problems. Write your statement on the
line.
a. Lucy has 5 pencils. Kim has 7 pencils. How many more pencils does Kim have than
Lucy?
______________________________________________.
b. Ben has 18 pencils. Anton has 9 pencils. How many fewer pencils does Anton
have than Ben?
______________________________________________.
c. Julio has 5 more pencils than Fran. Fran has 6 pencils. How many pencils does
Julio have?
______________________________________________.

235

a. b.
97, 98, ____, ____, ____, _____ 116, 117, ____, ____, ____
c. d.
____, 14, ____, ____, 11, ____ 112, 111, , 109, ,
tens ones tens ones
a. 82 b. 99
tens ones tens ones
c. ______ 9 6 d. _______ 10 5
4. Match the equal amounts.
a. 51 8 tens 6 ones
b. 68 8 ones 6 tens
c. 114 4 tens 11 ones
d. 86 11 tens 4 ones

236

a. 69 79
b. 15 50
c. 99 101
d. 110 108
e. 61 5 tens 11 ones
6. Ben thinks 92 ones is greater than 9 tens 2 ones. Is he correct? Explain your
thinking using words, pictures, or numbers. Draw and write about tens and ones to
explain your thinking.
7. Find the mystery numbers. Explain how you know the answers.
a. 10 more than 90 is ______. b. 10 less than 90 is _______.
9 0 9 0
c. 1 more than 90 is _______. d. 1 less than 90 is ________.
9 0 9 0

237

8. Solve for each unknown number. Use the space provided to show your work.
a. 80 + 6 = _____ b. 20 + _____ = 80
c. 7 tens _______________ = 4 tens d. 90 40 = _____
e. 68 + 7 = _____ f. 51 + 20 = _____
g. 46 + 31 = _____ h. 46 + 35 = _____

238

Mid-Module Assessment Task Topics AD

Standards Addressed
Represent and solve problems involving addition and subtraction.
1.OA.1 Use addition and subtraction within 20 to solve word problems involving situations of
adding to, taking from, putting together, taking apart, and comparing, with unknowns in
all positions, e.g., by using objects, drawings, and equations with a symbol for the
1.NBT.1 Count to 120, starting at any number less than 120. In this range, read and write
numerals and represent a number of objects with a written numeral.
Understand place value.
1.NBT.2 Understand that the two digits of a two-digit number represent amounts of tens and
ones. Understand the following as special cases:
1.NBT.3 Compare two two-digit numbers based on meanings of the tens and ones digits,
recording the results of comparisons with the symbols >, =, and <.
Use place value understanding and properties of operations to add and subtract.
1.NBT.4 Add within 100, including adding a two-digit number and a one-digit number, and adding
a two-digit number and a multiple of 10, using concrete models or drawings and
1.NBT.5 Given a two-digit number, mentally find 10 more or 10 less than the number, without
having to count; explain the reasoning used.
1.NBT.6 Subtract multiples of 10 in the range 1090 from multiples of 10 in the range 1090
(positive or zero differences), using concrete modules or drawings and strategies based
on place value, properties of operations, and/or the relationship between addition and

239

Evaluating Student Learning Outcomes

A Progression Toward Mastery is provided to describe steps that illuminate the gradually increasing
understandings that students develop on their way to proficiency. In this chart, this progress is presented
from left (Step 1) to right (Step 4). The learning goal for students is to achieve Step 4 mastery. These steps
are meant to help teachers and students identify and celebrate what the students CAN do now and what they
need to work on next.
A Progression Toward Mastery
Assessment STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4

Task Item Little evidence of Evidence of some Evidence of some Evidence of solid
reasoning without reasoning without reasoning with a reasoning with a
a correct answer. a correct answer. correct answer or correct answer.
evidence of solid
reasoning with an
incorrect answer.
(1 Point) (2 Points) (3 Points) (4 Points)
1 Student answers are Student answers are Student answers are Student correctly:
incorrect, and there is incorrect, but there is correct, but the responses Solves each word
no evidence of evidence of reasoning. are incomplete (e.g., may problem.
1.OA.1 reasoning. For example, student is be missing labels for the
a. Kim has 2 more
able to write a number drawing, an addition
pencils than
sentence. sentence, or an
Lucy.
explanation). Student
work is essentially strong. b. Anton has 9
fewer pencils
than Ben.
c. Julio has 11
pencils.
Demonstrates
understanding of
the problem
situation through
drawing/modeling.
2 Student is unable to Student completes at Student completes at Student identifies all

complete any one least one sequence. least one sequence as well numbers in the
sequence of numbers. as at least two numbers in sequences:
1.NBT.1 each additional sequence. 97, 98, 99, 100,
OR 101, 102
Student completes two or 116, 117, 118, 119,
more sequences correctly. 120
15, 14, 13, 12, 11,
10
112, 111, 110, 109,
108, 107

240

3 Student does not Student demonstrates Student demonstrates Student completes all
demonstrate inconsistent some understanding of correctly:
understanding of tens understanding of tens most aspects of tens and a. 8-2 (or 7-12 or
1.NBT.2 and ones and is unable and ones, completing ones, completing at least 0-82)
to complete more than only two answers three answers correctly.
b. 9-9 (or 0-99)
one answer correctly. correctly.
c. 96
d. 105
4 Student does not Student demonstrates Student demonstrates Student matches all
demonstrate limited understanding some understanding of four equal amounts
understanding of the of the equivalent the equivalent as follows:
1.NBT.2 equivalent representations of tens representations of tens a. 51 = 4 tens 11
representations of tens and ones, matching and ones, matching three ones
and ones and is unable one or two equal equal amounts.
b. 68 = 8 ones 6
to match any equal amounts.
tens
amounts.
c. 114 = 11 tens 4
ones
d. 86 = 8 tens 6
ones
5 Student is unable to Student has limited Student has some ability Student correctly
use symbols to ability to use symbols to use symbols to answers:
compare numbers and to compare numbers, compare numbers, a. <
1.NBT.3 is unable to correctly correctly answering correctly answering three
b. <
answer more than one two of the five or four of the five
of the five comparisons. comparisons. c. <
comparisons. d. >
e. =
6 Student demonstrates Student uses drawings Student demonstrates Student correctly uses
little to no or words to accurately some understanding of drawings or words
understanding of depict at least one of using place value to that depict place
1.NBT.2 comparing numbers the two numbers, compare numbers and value to accurately
based on tens and demonstrating limited correctly identifies the explain that 92 ones is
ones, answering understanding of the greater number but does the same as 9 tens 2
incorrectly. There is no use of place value to not fully explain reasoning ones.
evidence of reasoning. compare numbers. using place value.
OR
Student answers
incorrectly because of an
error such as transcription
but demonstrates strong
understanding of place
value through drawing or
words.

241

7 Student demonstrates Student demonstrates Student demonstrates the Student identifies the
little or no limited understanding ability to mentally add or following:
understanding of of mentally adding or subtract 10, correctly a. 100
1.NBT.5 mentally adding or subtracting 10, identifying four mystery
b. 80
1.NBT.2 subtracting 10. identifying at least two numbers, but reasoning is
Answers are incorrect, correct mystery unclear because no charts c. 91
and there is no numbers, but does not have been completed d. 89
evidence of reasoning. complete any charts accurately. and accurately
accurately. OR completes the charts
Student accurately to depict the arrow
completes charts but way.
makes an error in mental
calculation on one or two
of (a), (b), (c), or (d).
8 Student demonstrates Student demonstrates Student demonstrates the Student correctly:

little or no ability to some ability to add (or ability to add (and Solves
add or subtract two- subtract) two-digit subtract) two-digit
1.NBT.4 a. 86
digit numbers to 100, numbers, answering at numbers, answering at
answering two or least four of eight least six of eight correctly, b. 60
1.NBT.6
fewer questions correctly, and or uses a sound process c. 3 tens
correctly. demonstrates throughout with four d. 50
misunderstandings of calculation errors at most.
e. 75
place value.
f. 71
g. 77
h. 81
Represents the
process to
accurately solve
through drawings,
number bonds, or
the arrow way.
The notation
demonstrates the
use of a sound
strategy for adding
or subtracting.

242


243


244

a. b.
c. d.

245


246

1 Mathematics Curriculum
GRADE
GRADE 1 MODULE 6
Topic E
Coins and Their Values
1.MD.3
Focus Standard: 1.MD.3 1 Tell and write time in hours and half-hours using analog and digital clocks. Recognize
and identify coins, their names, and their value.
Through Topic E, students learn about the four most predominant U.S. coins in
circulation: the penny, the nickel, the dime, and the quarter. Students identify and
use the coins based on their image, name, or value (1.MD.3).
In Lesson 20, students are introduced to the nickel, which they then use alongside
the familiar dime and penny. Students consider various ways to represent common
values. For instance, students represent a value of 10 by using 1 ten (the dime) or
10 ones (pennies), as well as the well-known decomposition of 5 + 5 (2 nickels).
Students use their background with number bonds to decompose the larger value
into the various compositions.
Lesson 21 introduces students to the quarter, which can be the most challenging
coin to learn. Students build on their understanding from Lesson 20, focusing
specifically on the value of 25. They consider how many pennies they would need
to have the same value as 1 quarter and then trade in 2 dimes and 1 nickel or 2
dimes and 5 pennies for a quarter. Again, students use their prior work with
number bonds and place value charts to consider the various compositions.
During Lesson 22, students continue to work with all four coins. Various sequences are provided to best
match the learning needs of the class. Finally, in Lesson 23, students count on from any coin to create various
values.
To culminate the topic, students use dimes and pennies as representations of numbers to 120, connecting the
prior knowledge students have developed throughout the module to their work in Topic E.
1Focus on money.
Topic E: Coins and Their Values

247

NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Topic E 16
A Teaching Sequence Toward Mastery of Coins and Their Values

Objective 1: Identify pennies, nickels, and dimes by their image, name, or value. Decompose the values
of nickels and dimes using pennies and nickels.
(Lesson 20)
Objective 2: Identify quarters by their image, name, or value. Decompose the value of a quarter using
pennies, nickels, and dimes.
(Lesson 21)
Objective 3: Identify varied coins by their image, name, or value. Add one cent to the value of any coin.
(Lesson 22)
Objective 4: Count on using pennies from any single coin.

(Lesson 23)
Objective 5: Use dimes and pennies as representations of numbers to 120.

(Lesson 24)
Topic E: Coins and Their Values

248

Lesson 20
Objective: Identify pennies, nickels, and dimes by their image, name, or
value. Decompose the values of nickels and dimes using pennies and
nickels.


Standards Check: True or False Number Sentences 1.NBT.3 (5 minutes)


Standards Check: True or False Number Sentences (5 minutes)

Write a true or false number sentence. Students write a happy face on their personal boards if the number
sentence is true. If the sentence is false, students write it with the correct symbol. Notice which problem
types are difficult for them.
Lesson 20: Identify pennies, nickels, and dimes by their image, name, or value.
Decompose the values of nickels and dimes using pennies and nickels. 249

Use the first two columns (ah) as the suggested sequence. At each checkpoint, decide whether students are
ready for the next column or whether they should continue with similar problem types. The third column (il)
is provided as a possible opportunity for a few students who would really enjoy a challenge.
a. 5 > 4 e. 40 + 5 = 45 i. 9 + 7 = 10 + 6
b. 50 > 40 f. 73 = 7 + 30 j. 16 + 10 = 26 10
c. 57 > 75 g. 82 < 8 tens 2 ones k. 12 6 > 9
d. 16 < 51 h. 97 > 9 ones 7 tens l. 90 < 89 + 1
Checkpoint. Checkpoint.
Tamra saw 10 cheetahs at the zoo. She saw 8 more leopards than
cheetahs. How many leopards did she see?
Note: Today's problem is a compare with bigger unknown problem
type. Some students may incorrectly solve the problem because of their
reliance on the term more, rather than on their understanding of the
comparison. Look at students drawings to see how they made meaning
of the problem.

Materials: (T) 5 dimes, 15 pennies, and 3 nickels (plastic or real) (S) 5 dimes, 15 pennies, 3 nickels (plastic or
real), personal white board, spinner (Template) (optional), paper clip, pencil

T: (Lay out or project 1 dime.) What is the name of this coin?
S: A dime.
T: What is the value of one dime?
S: 10 cents!
T: Take out your dime, and show it to me. (Wait as students take it out. On chart paper, record the
dime using a circle with the number 10 in it.)
T: I want a number of pennies to equal the value of a dime. How many pennies do I need?
S: 10 pennies!
T: Why do I need 10 pennies to have 1 dime?
S: Pennies are worth 1 cent. You need 10 pennies to make 10 cents. A dime is worth the same as
10 pennies.
T: So, 1 dime (point to the dime on the chart paper) is equal
to 10 pennies. Count the pennies for me as I draw, and
when we get to 10, dont say 10 pennies but
S: 1 dime!
T: Count as I point.
S: 1 penny, 2 pennies, 3 pennies, , 9 pennies, 1 dime.

T: (Hold up or project a nickel.) Two of these together

have the same value as a dime. (Create a number
bond with the coins, as shown to the right. Record the
number bond, leaving out the value of the nickels.)
T: What is the value of this coin? Turn and talk with a
partner, and make a number bond to show your
thinking. Tell your partner how you know. (Wait as
students discuss.)
T: What is the value? NOTES ON
S: 5 cents! (After students show their boards, add the MULTIPLE MEANS
value 5 to the two number bond parts.) OF REPRESENTATION:
T: How do you know? Make sure both parts are the same
S: The number bond needs the same number for both number in students number bonds.
parts. So, it must be 2 fives to make 10. Its like a Since they are both the same kind of
coin, the two parts must be the same
doubles fact. 5 + 5 = 10, so they must be five cents
value.
each. I have nickels at home. I know they are worth
5 cents.
T: This coin is called a nickel. Find all the nickels in your
bag. (Wait as students identify the nickels.)
T: Sort the rest of your coins into piles, so we can easily
get what we need for todays lesson. Put each pile on
your personal white board, and write the name and
value of the coin under the pile. (Wait as students sort
dimes, pennies, and nickels.)
T: What is one of the ways we made 10 cents?
S: We made 10 cents with 10 pennies. We made 10 cents with 1 dime. We made 10 cents with
2 nickels. We made 10 cents with a nickel (5 cents) and 5 pennies (1 cent each).
T: (Display 2 nickels.) Two nickels is 10 cents. How many cents will I have when I put down 1 more
nickel? (Wait as students determine the answer. Have them turn and talk as necessary.)
S: 15 cents!
T: Work with a partner to make 15 cents in different
ways. (Wait and listen as students lay out coins to
NOTES ON
make 15 cents.)
MULTIPLE MEANS
T: How did you make 15 cents? OF REPRESENTATION:
S: We used 15 pennies. Pennies are worth 1 cent. If students struggle to generate
15 pennies is 15 cents. We used 1 dime and 5 combinations of coins, guide students
pennies. Thats 1 ten and 5 ones. We did like you through trading pennies for a nickel or
did. We got 3 nickels. We used 1 dime and 1 nickel a dime using questions such as, How
to make 15, since its 10 and 5. We used 2 nickels many pennies would we need to trade
and 5 pennies. The two nickels make 10, and then for a nickel? Do we have enough to do
5 more pennies makes 15. (As student share, record this?
their combinations on the chart paper.)

Use the following suggested sequence, asking students to work with a partner to create a coin combination
that has the given value. Record the combinations for each value on chart paper.
6 cents
11 cents
16 cents
20 cents
After students have successfully shown ways to make the above totals, provide the following riddles.
T: (Project or write 2 + 3.) I want to use 1 coin to represent the total of 2 + 3. Which coin would I use?
Tell a partner.
T: Which coin could represent the total of 2 + 3?
S: A nickel!
T: How do you know?
S: 2 + 3 = 5. A nickel has a value of 5 cents.
Repeat the process with the following examples:
1 coin to represent the total of 6 + 4
1 coin to represent the total of 5 + 1 + 4
1 coin to represent the total of 1 + 0 or the value of 6 5
1 coin to represent the total of 4 + 1
2 coins to represent the total of 17 + 3
2 coins to represent the total of 2 + 8
If time permits, partners may play Coin Trade. The object of the game is to continue to trade coins, always
having 10 cents.
Materials: Each player has 10 pennies, the spinner with a paper clip and pencil; each pair has a pot with
pennies, nickels, and dimes for trading per pair.
Partner A spins the spinner.

Partner A trades pennies for the coin landed on. (For instance, if the
student lands on a nickel, he trades 5 pennies for 1 nickel. If he lands on
a dime, he trades 10 pennies for 1 dime. If he lands on a penny, he
trades a penny for a penny.) Player A counts his coins to be sure he still
has 10 cents.
Partner B takes a turn. Player B counts her coins to be sure she still has
10 cents.
Play continues as time allows.
The person with the most pennies at the end of the game is the winner.
As play continues, students might land on the coins they already have, such as landing on a penny when they
have 10 pennies. Students may trade one of their pennies for a new penny. Play the game for about five
minutes or as time allows.



Lesson Objective: Identify pennies, nickels, and dimes by
their image, name, or value. Decompose the values of
nickels and dimes using pennies and nickels.
to debrief the Problem Set and process the lesson. Any
combination of the questions below may be used to lead
the discussion.
Look at Problem 1. What parts of the picture of
each coin help you identify it?
Look at Problem 4. Share your solutions. Are
there only two ways to make 10 cents with your
coins? How many different ways can we make
10 cents using our coins?
If you had to carry around 10 cents all day, which
combination of coins would you want to carry?
Why?
Which coin was new to us today? (Nickel.)
Describe the coin in as many ways as you can.

assessing the students understanding of the concepts that

Name Date
1. Use the word bank to label the coin. The front and back of the coin is shown.
penny
nickel
dime
a. _____________ b. _____________ c. _____________
2. Draw more pennies to show the value of each coin.
a. 1
b. 1
3.

4. Anton has 10 cents in his pocket. One of his coins is a nickel. Draw coins to show
two different ways he could have ten cents with the coins he has in his pocket.
5. Emi says she has more money than Kiana. Is she correct? Why or why not?
Emi is correct/not correct because ______________________________________
_________________________________________________________________

Name Date
1. Match the pennies to the coin with the same value.
a.
b.
2. Ben has 10 cents. He has 1 nickel. Draw more coin(s) to show what other coin(s) he
might have.

Name Date
1. Match.
2. Cross off some pennies so the remaining pennies show the value of the coin to their
left.
a.
b.

3. Maria has 5 cents in her pocket. Draw coins to show two different ways she could
have 5 cents.
4. Solve. Draw a line to match the number sentence with the coin (or coins) that give
the answer.
a. 10 cents + 10 cents = _____ cents
b. 10 cents - 5 cents = _____ cents
c. 20 cents 10 cents = _____ cents
d. 9 cents 8 cents = _____ cents

spinner: each group or set of partners needs 1 circle from this page. see image for use with pencil and paper clip.

Lesson 21
Objective: Identify quarters by their image, name, or value. Decompose
the value of a quarter using pennies, nickels, and dimes.


Note: Based on the needs of the class, select a Sprint. There are several possible options available.
1. Re-administer the Sprint from the previous days lesson.
Willie saw 11 monkeys at the zoo. He saw 4 fewer monkeys than

tigers. How many tigers did he see at the zoo?
Note: Today's problem is a compare with bigger unknown where the
problem suggests the wrong operation. Students are expected to have
worked with these problems in Grade 1, but mastery is not expected until
the end of Grade 2. Consider scaffolding such as, Set up your tape
diagram to first show the same number of monkeys and tigers. Which
animal did Willie see more of, monkeys or tigers? Add another section of
tape (the more tape) to the tigers. How many more tigers than monkeys
did Willie see?
Lesson 21: Identify quarters by their image, name, or value. Decompose the value
of a quarter using pennies, nickels, and dimes. 260

Materials: (T) 4 quarters, 5 dimes, 5 nickels, 25 pennies (plastic or real), chart paper (S) 1 quarter, 3 dimes,
3 nickels, 25 pennies (plastic or real), 1 die per set of partners, Problem Set
Note: Prepare the chart shown to the right prior to the lesson.
Gather students in the meeting area with their coins. Hold the Problem Set to the side.
T: Sort your coins into piles like we did yesterday so that we can
find the coins we want more quickly. (Wait as students sort
their coins.)
T: Put your finger on one dime. What is the value of one dime?
S: 10 cents!
T: Put your finger on one penny. What is the value of one penny?
S: 1 cent!
T: Put your finger on one nickel. What is the value of one nickel?
S: 5 cents!
T: What is the unit for each of these coins?
S: Cents!
T: You have 1 new coin. Pick up the new coin. Look at it closely, and describe what you notice about
this coin.
S: Its bigger than the other coins. It has bumpy edges, like the dime. The penny and the nickel have
smooth edges. There is an eagle on this one. This one has a states name on it!
T: This coin is called a quarter. Lets all say quarter.
S: Quarter!
T: Some quarters have different images on the back. Many have eagles on them, but others have
different pictures and names of the states on them. (Show a few different images of quarters.)
But no matter what, a quarter has a value of 25 cents.
T: Lets use our coins to make 25 cents in different ways and record them on our chart.
T: How many pennies make 25 cents?
S: 25 pennies!
T: Count out 25 pennies. Please arrange them in 5-groups. Ill give you about one minute.
T: To draw 1 penny, we make a circle and write the value of the coin on it. (Demonstrate.) What is the
value of 1 penny?
S: 1 cent.
T: Here is your chart. (Distribute the Problem Set to students.)
T: Quickly draw one penny, and show me your work. (Check students work.) Now you have about one
minute to draw 25 pennies in the first row of the Problem Set. Use the 5-group way.
T: How many tens do you see?
S: 2.

T: How many ones do you see?

S: 25.
T: How many ones are not grouped in a ten?
S: 5.
T: Go down one row. What coins do we want to use to make 25 cents now?
S: Dimes and pennies!
T: Look at your 25 pennies without touching them. What is a way to trade to make 25 cents with dimes
and pennies? Talk to your partner.
S: I can trade 10 pennies for 1 dime. I can trade 20 pennies for 2 dimes. I could put 2 dimes and
5 pennies. I can put 1 dime and 15 pennies.
T: Go ahead and change pennies for dimes. Put the dimes where the pennies used to be. (Allow time
MP.4
for students to work.)
T: To draw 1 dime, we make a circle and write the value of the dime on it. What is the value of 1 dime?
S: 10 cents.
T: What will you draw on the circle to show a dime?
S: 10. NOTES ON
T: Record one way you used dimes and pennies to make MULTIPLE MEANS
25 cents. OF ENGAGEMENT:
S: (Record.) To immerse students in coins more
T: Which was simpler, drawing 25 pennies or the dimes fully, consider a classroom economy
and pennies? program for the duration of the year.
Provide students with plastic or real
S: The dimes and pennies! coins for completing their classroom
T: If you are ready to do the rest of the problems on your tasks. The money earned can be
own in the chart, you may return to your desk with pooled toward a class goal or used
your coins and Problem Set. I will continue working individually in a class store.
here on the carpet with those who want to work
together.
Continue the process, emphasizing systematic trading and
inviting alternate ways to use the coins indicated. Close by NOTES ON
returning to the quarter.
MULTIPLE MEANS
T:How many quarters make 25 cents? OF EXPRESSION:
S:1. For students who need visual
T:(Write 1 before quarter, draw a circle, and write 25 reminders of the names and values of
within it on the last row of the Problem Set.) the coins, hang chart paper with the
name, value, and image of each coin.
T: What is the easiest coin to use to show 25 cents?
S: A quarter!
T: Take a moment to review with your partner all the ways that you showed that have the same value
as a quarter.
Optional Activity: Engage students in a game of 25 Cents. The object of the game is to be the first player to
exchange their money for 1 quarter.

Materials: One die; 25 pennies, nickels, dimes, and

quarters for trading; and a pot per pair of
students
Put all coins in a pot between the partners.

Player A rolls the die and takes that number of
pennies.
Player B rolls the die and does the same.
On each turn, players roll the die, add the
additional pennies, and exchange their pennies
for larger coins, if possible. For instance, if Player
A has 6 pennies, she may trade 5 pennies for 1
nickel. If Player B has 1 nickel and 5 pennies, he
may trade the coins for 1 dime.
Play continues until a player can exchange his
coins for 1 quarter, explaining that he has 25
cents.

Lesson Objective: Identify quarters by their image, name,

or value. Decompose the value of a quarter using pennies,
nickels, and dimes.

Look at Problem 4. How many more nickels did you need to make 25 cents than you needed to
make 10 cents?
What attributes of the coins help you recognize each?
What is the name of the coin that has a value of 25 cents? (Quarter.)
Where do you see quarters? What coins could you use to buy a snack that costs 55 cents?


Name Date
1. Use different coin combinations to make 25 cents.
a.
____ pennies
b.
____ dimes
____ pennies
c.
____ dimes
____ nickels
d.
____ nickels
____ pennies
e.
____ nickels
f.
____ quarter

2. Use the word bank to label the coins. pennies nickels dimes quarters
a. ____________ b. ____________ c. ____________ d. ____________
3. Draw different coins to show the value of the coin shown.
4. Match the coin combinations to the coin with the same value.
a.
b.
c.

Name Date
Use the word bank to write the names of the coins.
dimes nickels pennies quarters
a. ____________ b. ____________ c. ____________ d. ____________

Name Date
1. Use the word bank to label the coins.

dimes nickels pennies quarters
a. ____________ b. ____________ c. ____________ d. ____________
2. Write the value of each coin.

a. The value of one dime is _______ cent(s).
b. The value of one penny is _______ cent(s).
c. The value of one nickel is _______ cent(s).
d. The value of one quarter is _______ cent(s).
3. Your mom said she will give you 1 nickel or 1 quarter. Which would you take, and
why?
_________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________

4. Lee has 25 cents in his piggy bank. Which coin or coins could be in his bank?
a. Draw to show the coins that could be
b.

Lesson 22
Objective: Identify varied coins by their image, name, or value. Add one
cent to the value of any coin.


Standards Check: Addition Within 20 1.OA.6 (8 minutes)

Standards Check: Addition Within 20 (8 minutes)

Note: This fluency activity shows which strategies students are using to add within 20. Students may show
their work with a number bond, the arrow way, multi-step equations, or listing numbers to show how to
count on.
Write the following list of strategies:
1. Count all.
2. Count on.
3. Make ten.
Lesson 22: Identify varied coins by their image, name, or value. Add one cent to
the value of any coin. 270

4. Use a doubles fact.

5. Use a helper problem (e.g., to solve 15 + 3, add 5 and 3 first).
Say an addition expression. Students use their personal boards to solve. Choose students who used different
strategies to share what they did, or instruct students to share their strategies with a partner.
Suggested sequence:
9 + 2, 3 + 9, 2 + 8 + 2
5 + 6, 7 + 6, 4 + 4 + 6
15 + 1, 3 + 16
13 + 4, 12 + 7

Peter has 6 more red pencils than blue pencils. He has 8 blue pencils.
How many red pencils does he have?
Note: Todays problem is a compare with bigger unknown problem type.
Because yesterdays Application Problem suggested an incorrect operation,
students may expect the same experience with todays problem. Encourage
students to read through the entire problem, checking that their drawings and
solutions make sense for all sentences in the story problem. Having students
check their work helps them to become better problem solvers. Be sure to
point this out.

Materials: (T) 510 different quarters (e.g., various commemorative quarters), 5 dimes, 5 nickels (possibly
with different images), 20 pennies, 1 dollar coin if available (real or plastic), projector
(S) 1 quarter, 25 dimes, 35 nickels, 1020 pennies (real or plastic), 1 die, coin spinner with
quarter (Template), paper clip, pencil per pair, personal white board
Gather students in the meeting area with their materials. Distribute 1 or 2 coins to each student as they
come to the meeting area.
T: I had all of these coins at home. Tell your partner the
name and value of the coin(s) you have. Explain how NOTES ON
you know what coin it is. (Wait as students share. MULTIPLE MEANS
Consider having them pass their coin to the right until
OF ENGAGEMENT:
each student has had a chance to identify all the major
coins.) If a classroom economy has started,
use students coins to have them
T: Lets sort them into piles of the same coin. (Call out identify the image, name, and value of
each coin. Students holding that type of coin place coins. Allow students to trade their
their coins in a common pile in the middle of the pennies (or nickels) for different coins
group.) if they have enough to do so.

T: (Point to the pennies.) What kind of coins are these?

S: Pennies!
T: What is the value of 1 penny?
S: 1 cent!
T: (Push forward 1 nickel.) What is the name of this coin?
S: Its a nickel.
T: What is its value?
S: 5 cents.
T: Use a complete sentence. A nickels value is?
S: A nickels value is 5 cents.
T: (Push 1 penny next to the nickel.) If I have 1 nickel and 1 penny, how
many cents do I have altogether?
S: 6 cents!
MP.4
T: How do you know?
S: 5 + 1 = 6. 5 cents plus one more cent is 6 cents.
T: (Draw 1 nickel and 1 penny on the chart paper,
including their individual values and their total value, NOTES ON
as shown to the right.) MULTIPLE MEANS
Repeat the process, first with 1 dime and 1 penny, and then with OF ENGAGEMENT:
1 quarter and 1 penny. Finally, push forward the dollar coin. Engage students in a hunt at home for
quarters, pennies, and nickels with
T: (Push forward a 1 dollar coin.) Does anyone know the
various images. When students bring
name of this coin? in their findings, have them sort and
S: Its a dollar coin! (If students do not know, introduce name each coin and its value.
this as a dollar coin.) Encourage students to share
T: A dollar coin is worth 100 cents! interesting observations.
T: (Push 1 penny next to the dollar coin.) If I have a

1 dollar coin whose value is 100 cents and 1 penny,
how many cents do I have altogether?
S: 101 cents!
T: (Add the dollar coin and penny to the chart paper,
including their individual values and their total value.)
Based on students ability to identify the name, value, and image of each coin, choose one of the games
played during the past two days. To practice coin values of the dime, nickel, and penny, play Coin Trade.
To practice adding on coins as well as trading coins, play 25 Cents.

Coin Trade
If students are ready, include the quarter, and use the new spinner at the end of this lesson.
The object of the game is to continue to trade coins, always having 10 cents.
Materials: Each player has 10 pennies (25 pennies, if using the new spinner) and the spinner with a paper
clip and pencil; each pair has a pot with pennies, nickels, and dimes (and quarters if using the new
spinner) for trading per pair.
Partner A spins the spinner.

Partner A trades pennies for the coin landed on. (For instance, if the student lands on a nickel, he
trades 5 pennies for 1 nickel. If he lands on a dime, he trades 10 pennies for 1 dime. If he lands on a
penny, he trades a penny for a penny.) Player A counts his coins to be sure he still has 10 cents.
Partner B takes a turn. Player B counts her coins to be sure she still has 10 cents.
Play continues as time allows.
The person with the most pennies at the end of the game is the winner.
As play continues, students might land on the coins they already have, such as landing on a penny when they
have 10 pennies. Students may trade one of their pennies for a new penny. Play the game for about five
minutes or as time allows.
25 Cents
The object of the game is to be the first player to exchange their money for 1 quarter. For students who are
ready for greater challenges, you can choose to make the goal 50 cents or 100 cents.
Materials: One die; 25 pennies, 5 nickels, 3 dimes and 2 quarters for trading; and a pot per pair of students
Put all coins in a pot in the middle.

Player A rolls the die and takes that number of pennies.
Player B rolls the die and does the same.
On each turn, players roll the die, add the additional pennies, and exchange their pennies for larger
coins, if possible. For instance, if Player A has 6 pennies, he may trade 5 pennies for 1 nickel. If
Player B has 1 nickel and 5 pennies, she may trade the coins for 1 dime.
Play continues until a player can exchange his coins for 1 quarter, explaining that he has 25 cents.


Lesson Objective: Identify varied coins by their image,

name, or value. Add one cent to the value of any coin.
lesson.
Look at Problem 2. What other combinations of
coins could you use to have the same value as a
quarter? As a dime? As a nickel?
Look at Problem 3. What are some ways to tell a
nickel from a quarter?
Create other problems like those in Problem 5.
Who can identify the coin with the same value?
What new coin did we see today? (Dollar coin.
If applicable) Have you seen the dollar coin
before? Where have you seen or used it?


Name Date
1. Use the word bank to label the coins. quarter dime nickel penny
a. ____________ b. ____________ c. ____________ d. ____________
2. Match the coin combinations to the coin on the right with the same value.
a.
b.
c.

3.
4. Ben thinks he has more money than Peter. Is he correct? Why or why not?
Money Money
Ben is ________________ because _____________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
5. Solve. Match each statement to the coin that shows the value
of the answer.
a. 5 pennies = _____ cents
b. 6 cents + 4 cents = _____ cents
c. 1 quarter = _____ cents
d. 6 cents 5 cents = _____ cent(s)

Name Date
Draw a line to match each coin to its correct name.
dime
nickel
penny
quarter

Name Date
1. Match the label to the correct coins, and write the value. There will be more than
one match for each coin name.
a.
nickel
cents
b.
dime
cents
c.
quarter
cents
d.
penny
cent

2. Lee has one coin in his pocket, and Pedro has 3 coins. Pedro has more money than
Lee. Draw a picture to show the coins each boy might have.
3. Bailey has 4 coins in her pocket, and Ingrid has 4 coins. Ingrid has more money than
Bailey. Draw a picture to show the coins each girl might have.

coin spinner with quarter

Lesson 23
Objective: Count on using pennies from any single coin.


Standards Check: Subtraction Within 20 1.OA.6 (8 minutes)

Standards Check: Subtraction Within 20 (8 minutes)

Note: This fluency activity shows which strategies students are using to subtract within 20. Students may
show their work with a number bond, the arrow way, multi-step equations, or listing numbers to show how
to count on.
Write the following list of strategies:
1. Count on or back.
2. Think of the addition problem.
3. Take from ten.
4. Use place value and a helper problem.

281

Say a subtraction expression. Students use their personal white boards to solve. Choose students who used
different strategies to share what they did, or instruct students to share their strategies with a partner.
Suggested sequence:
15 1, 18 2
18 4, 19 7
12 3, 11 2
15 9, 17 8
16 14, 18 15

Peter has 8 more green crayons than yellow crayons. Peter has
10 green crayons. How many yellow crayons does Peter have?
Note: Todays problem is a compare with smaller unknown
where the problem suggests the wrong operation. Students
are expected to have worked with these problems in Grade 1,
but mastery is not expected until the end of Grade 2. Consider
scaffolding such as, Set up your tape diagram to first show the
same number of green crayons and yellow crayons. Does Peter
have more green crayons or yellow crayons? Add another
section of tape (the more tape) to the green crayons. How
many more green crayons does he have than yellow crayons?

Materials: (T) 1 quarter, 35 dimes, 24 nickels, 15 pennies (plastic or real), projector (S) 1 quarter,
35 dimes, 25 nickels, 25 pennies (plastic or real), 1 die per pair of students
Gather students in the meeting area with personal boards. Coins and dice are not needed until students play
the game toward the end of the Concept Development.
T: (Project 1 quarter.) What is the name of this coin?
S: A quarter!
T: What is its value?
S: 25 cents.
T: (Add 1 penny to the quarter being projected.) How much money is shown now?
S: 26 cents!
T: How do you know?
S: You added one penny. Thats one cent more.
T: What is 1 quarter plus 1 penny, a quarpenny? No such thing! But we can add their values! Lets try.

282

T: Tell me an addition sentence that puts together the value of the quarter and the value of the penny.
S: 25 + 1 = 26.
T: Tell me an addition sentence that puts together the value of a dime and the value of 3 pennies.
S: 10 + 3 = 13.
T: So, a dime and 3 pennies would be how much money?
S: 13 cents.
T: Try some more!
Repeat the process by projecting the following sequence of coins:
1 quarter, add 3 pennies
3 dimes, add 6 pennies NOTES ON
(Use 5-group formation to show the 6 pennies. Discuss MULTIPLE MEANS
why the 5-group formation helps students know the OF EXPRESSION:
total amount of pennies without counting.)
Some students may have difficulty
1 nickel, add 4 pennies keeping track of counted and
4 pennies, add 1 nickel uncounted coins. Invite students to
(Have students explain which coins they counted first place their own coins out to match the
and why. Accept both preferences.) teachers set of coins. Using these
coins, students may rearrange the
Practice counting on pennies using the following sequence: coins or slide the coins over as they
3 pennies, 1 nickel count.
3 pennies, 1 quarter
4 pennies, 1 quarter
T: (Show 1 penny, 1 dime, 4 pennies.) How can we group
these to make it easier to count?
S: Put all the pennies together!
T: Great! Which will we be starting with, the dime or the
pennies?
NOTES ON
S: The dime! MULTIPLE MEANS
T: That is just easier; I agree. So, lets move all the OF ENGAGEMENT:
pennies together and place them after the dime. Have students, who may have difficulty
(Move the first penny next to the 4 pennies.) keeping track of their total coin values
T: Tell me an addition sentence that puts together the between turns, use their boards to
value of a dime, the value of 4 pennies, and the value keep track of their totals as they play.
of 1 penny.
S: 10 + 4 + 1 = 15.
Continue to practice counting on pennies, regardless of the order of the coins using the following sequence:
2 pennies, 1 dime, 2 pennies
2 pennies, 1 quarter, 3 pennies
1 quarter, 7 pennies
(Be sure to use the 5-group formation when presenting the 7 pennies. Discuss how the formation
can help students use the make ten strategy to add.)

283

Note: If time permits, have partners play First to 50 Cents (a version of Coin Exchange). The objective of the
game is to be the first player with 50 cents.
First to 50 Cents
Players A and B each begin with 1 quarter.
1. Player A rolls the die and adds that many pennies to his quarter.
2. Player B rolls the die and adds that many pennies to her quarter.
3. Players continue to take turns until someone has at least 50 cents, trading pennies for nickels or
dimes. No player who has 25 pennies can win!
Players might trade pennies for nickels, dimes, and finally a quarter as they play.

Lesson Objective: Count on using pennies from any single

coin.
lesson.
Look at Problem 2. How do 5-group formations help you count coins quickly?
Three dimes and 1 dime is 4 dimes. Three pennies and 1 penny is 4 pennies. Why is it that 3 dimes
and 1 penny dont equal 4 cents? What do we need to do in order to add dimes and pennies
together? What is our label, or unit, to add 3 dimes and 1 penny in a number sentence?
(30 cents + 1 cent = 31 cents. We change the unit to cents so that they have the same unit, which
can be added together.)

284

Look at Problem 2(b). How many cents are

there? Look at Problem 2(c). How many cents
are there? Why is the value of the coins in
Problem 2(c) greater than the value of the coins
in Problem 2(b) even though there are more
coins in Problem 2(b)?


285

Name Date
1. Add pennies to show the written amount.

a.
8 cents
b.
30 cents
c.
10 cents
d.
18 cents
2. Write the value of each group of coins.

a.
_____ cents

286

b.
_____ cents
c.
_____ cents
d.
_____ cents
e.
_____ cents

287

Name Date
Add pennies to show the written amount.

a.
9 cents
b.
29 cents

288

Name Date
1. Add pennies to show the written amount.

a.
15 cents
b.
28 cents
c.
22 cents
d.
32 cents
2. Write the value of each group of coins.

a.
_____ cents

289

b.
_____ cents
c.
_____ cents
d.
_____ cents
e.
_____ cents

290

Lesson 24
Objective: Use dimes and pennies as representations of numbers to 120.


Standards Check: Place Value 1.NBT.2 (3 minutes)


Standards Check: Place Value (3 minutes)

Note: This activity monitors students understanding of place value.

Write a number on a personal white board, but do not show students.
T: My number has 1 ten and 3 ones. Whats my number?
S: 13.
T: (Show the board.) Whats the value of this 1? (Pause, and then snap.)
S: 10.

291

T: Whats the value of this 3? (Pause, and then snap.)

S: 3.
Repeat with the following suggested sequence: 22, 27, 66, 63, 36, 90, and 99. Alternate saying the number in
the ones place first and saying the number in the tens place first. For the last minute, write a two-digit
number, and ask students to write the value of one of the digits on their personal white boards.
T: (Show 53.) Write the value of the 5.
S: (Write 50.)
There are 8 eggs in the carton. The carton can hold

12 eggs. How many more eggs will fit in the carton?
Note: Todays problem is a put together with addend
unknown problem type where students are looking for a
missing part. A single bar is effective, especially since the
problem is talking about one carton of eggs that looks like
a single tape.
However, some students may want to model the problem with two bars, in a sense comparing the given part
with the known total. This does make sense, especially considering they have been working with comparison
problems recently. Both solutions are modeled.
Materials: (T) 12 dimes, 10 pennies (plastic or real), projector (S) 12 dimes, 10 pennies (plastic or real),
personal white board
Pair students. Pairs begin the lesson at their desks or tables with all materials.
T: (Write 80 on the board.) Use your coins to represent this number. Draw a matching place value
chart on your personal white board.
S: (Use 8 dimes. Some may use 7 dimes and 10 pennies, which is considered correct as long as the
students place value chart matches his chosen representation.)
T: If I used only dimes to represent 80, how many dimes would I need?
S: 8 dimes!
T: How many tens are in 80?
S: 8 tens!
Repeat the process with the following suggested sequence: 50, 68, 82.
chart on your personal board.
S: (Use 9 dimes.)

292

T: If I used only dimes to represent 90, how many dimes would I need?
S: 9 dimes!
T: How many tens are in 90?
S: 9 tens!
chart on your personal white board.
S: (Use 9 dimes and 2 pennies.)
T: How many dimes would I need?
S: 9 dimes!
T: How many pennies?
S: 2 pennies!
T: How many tens and how many ones is this?
S: 9 tens and 2 ones.
T: (Write 100 on the board.) How many tens are in 100? Use your dimes to show 100 cents. (Wait as
students count out 10 dimes.)
S: (Show 10 dimes.)
T: How many dimes did we use to make 100 cents?
S: 10 dimes!
T: How many tens do you have?
S: 10 tens.
T: (Next to 100, add a place value chart showing 10 tens.)
T: Do we need any additional pennies?
S: No.
T: (Write 0 in the ones place on the place value chart.)
T: (Point to the place value chart.) 10 tens 0 ones is?
S: 100.
T: Lets add 1 more dime. (Wait as students add 1 dime to their
collection.) How many dimes do you have now?
S: 11 dimes!
T: Draw a place value chart on your personal white board to show 11 tens
0 ones. (Wait as students show this.)
MP.4
T: (Write 100 + 10 on the board.) We added ten cents to one hundred
cents. How many cents do we have now?
S: 110 cents.
T: How many tens are in 110 cents?
S: 11 tens!
T: Lets add 1 more dime. (Wait as students add 1 dime to their collection.) How many dimes do you
have now?
S: 12 dimes!

293

T: Draw a place value chart on your personal white board

to show 12 tens 0 ones. (Wait as students show this.)
NOTES ON
T: (Write 100 + 20 on the board.) We had 100 cents. MULTIPLE MEANS
Then, we added 2 more dimes for 20 more cents. OF REPRESENTATION:
How many cents do we have now?
Some students may have difficulty
S: 120 cents. determining the value of coins when
T: Look at your dimes. How many tens are in 120 cents? two different coins are used. Have
them count one type of coin at a time
S: 12 tens!
and use their personal white boards to
Note: Some students may be familiar with the value of a dollar help them keep track of what they
and may bring up that 100 cents is 1 dollar or that 120 cents is have counted.
$1.20. Let them know they are correct, but refocus them back
to the number of tens (dimes) and ones (pennies), as that is the
focus of this lesson.
Project the following sequences of coins, and have students
determine their total value: NOTES ON
4 dimes, 8 pennies MULTIPLE MEANS
4 dimes, 10 pennies OF ENGAGEMENT:
4 dimes, 12 pennies Continue to challenge advanced
students. As an extension to the
5 pennies, 6 dimes
lesson, add 2 or 4 nickels to the
15 pennies, 6 dimes sequence to the left, and have
10 dimes, 10 pennies students share their strategies to solve.
They may count the nickels as nickels,
If students need more practice or support representing the count the nickels together as a ten, or
numbers or the coins, continue presenting more two-digit ask to exchange two nickels for one
numbers. dime.
If students demonstrate strong skills in representing numbers to 120

using dimes and pennies, connect their understanding with their
addition work from Topics C and D as shown below:
T: (Write 52 on the board.) Partner A, use your coins to represent this number using as many dimes as
you can.
T: (Write 20 on the board.) Partner B, use your coins to represent this number using as many dimes as
you can.
T: (Place an addition symbol between the numbers to create an expression.) Add your coins together.
How much do you have? (Wait as students add the coins.)
S: 72 cents!
T: On your personal board, solve 52 + 20. (Wait as students solve.) How did you solve this problem?
S: I lined up my numbers and added the ones with ones and the tens with tens. There were only
2 ones. 5 tens + 2 tens is 7 tens. The total is 72. I did the same thing. Its just like adding the
dimes with the dimes. There were 2 pennies. Then, 5 dimes plus 2 dimes was 7 dimes. That makes
72 cents! I added 2 tens. 52, 62, 72. Thats like counting on the dimes.

294

Repeat the process using the following suggested

sequence: 52 + 24, 59 + 30, 59 + 31, 59 + 34. As students
share their solution strategies, ask them to make
connections between their coins and their written
notation. What similarities do they notice? What number
bonds do they see represented by the coin combinations?

Lesson Objective: Use dimes and pennies as

representations of numbers to 120.
lesson.
Look at Problem 2(a). How did you determine
which set of 8 would make 80 cents? What is the
value of the other set? How would a place value
chart for 8 pennies look compared to the place
value chart for 8 dimes?
Look at Problem 2(b). What is the value of the
set that does not equal 100 cents? How would
you show this value in a place value chart?
Look at Problem 3. What is another way to show
58 cents?

295



296

Name Date
1. Find the value of each set of coins. Complete the place value chart to match.
Write an addition sentence to add the value of the dimes and the value of the
pennies.
a.
________________________
b.
________________________
c.
_______________________

297

2. Check the set that shows the correct amount. Fill in the place value chart to match.
a. 80 cents
b. 100 cents
3. Draw 58 cents using dimes and pennies. Fill in the place value chart.

298

Name Date
Find the value of the set of coins. Complete the place value chart to match.
Write an addition sentence to add the value of the dimes and the value of the pennies.

299

Name Date
1. Find the value of each set of coins. Complete the place value chart.
Write an addition sentence to add the value of the dimes and the value of the
pennies.
a.
_________________________
b.
_________________________
c.
_________________________

300

2. Check the set that shows the correct amount. Fill in the place value chart to match.
110 cents
3. a. Draw 79 cents using dimes and pennies. Fill in the place value chart to match.
b. Draw 118 cents using dimes and pennies. Fill in the place value chart to match.

301

1
GRADE
GRADE 1 MODULE 6
Topic F
Varied Problem Types Within 20
1.OA.1
Focus Standard: 1.OA.1 Use addition and subtraction within 20 to solve word problems involving situations of
adding to, taking from, putting together, taking apart, and comparing, with unknowns
in all positions, e.g., by using objects, drawings, and equations with a symbol for the
Coherence -Links from: G1M3 Ordering and Comparing Length Measurements as Numbers
G1M4 Place Value, Comparison, Addition and Subtraction to 40
-Links to: G2M7 Problem Solving with Length, Money, and Data
Topic F provides students the opportunity to focus on solving various problem types and to learn from their
peers strategies.
Lessons 25 and 26 focus on the most challenging Grade 1 problem types: compare with bigger unknown and
compare with smaller unknown (1.OA.1). Students continue to strengthen their ability to recognize compare
problem types and solve for unknowns in varied positions. They also work with problem types that suggest
the incorrect operation, such as, Shanika went down the slide 15 times. She went down 3 more times than
Fran. How many times did Fran go down the slide? While students do not need to master this problem type
in Grade 1, exposure to these problems can support students long-term success. During Lesson 26, students
are provided more time to practice the various problem types and to learn to persevere in problem solving.
In Lesson 27, students practice all of the problem types they have encountered throughout the year. They
discuss their methods for solving the problems and explain their work, including answering such questions as,
How does Student As work help her solve the problem? How does Student Bs work help him solve the
problem? What compliment can we give Student A? What might Student A do to improve her work? What
do you notice about your own work after looking at Student As and Student Bs work?
Topic F: Varied Problem Types Within 20

302

NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Topic F 16
A Teaching Sequence Toward Mastery of Varied Problem Types Within 20

Objective 1: Solve compare with bigger or smaller unknown problem types.
(Lessons 2526)
Objective 2: Share and critique peer strategies for solving problems of varied types.
(Lesson 27)
Topic F: Varied Problem Types Within 20

303

Lesson 25


Standards Check: Add and Subtract Tens 1.NBT.4, 1.NBT.5 (5 minutes)

Materials: (S) Core Fluency Sprint (Lesson 3)
Note: Based on the needs of the class, select a Sprint. There are several possible options available.
1. Re-administer the Sprint from the previous lesson.
Standards Check: Add and Subtract Tens (5 minutes)

Note: This fluency activity monitors students ability to add and subtract tens. All students must be able to
find ten more or less than a number mentally.
T: Whats ten more than 25?
S: 35.
T: Write the number sentence.
S: (Write 25 + 10 = 35.)
T: Whats ten less than 25?
S: 15.
304

T: Write the number sentence.

S: (Write 25 10 = 15.)
T: Prove it. Draw quick tens and ones.
S: (Draw.)
Repeat with the suggested problem types. Alternate directing students to prove it with a number sentence, a
number bond, or quick tens and ones. Include opportunities for students to prove a subtraction problem with
an addition sentence (e.g., prove 10 less than 60 is 50 by writing 50 + 10 = 60).
Mentally calculate 10 more/less than any two-digit number.
Add and subtract multiples of 10 from multiples of 10 (e.g., 90 20; 40 + 50).
Calculate multiples of 10 more than any two-digit number (e.g., 37 + 40).
Materials: (T) Chart paper (S) Personal white board
Note: As students approach each problem, give them the opportunity to persevere and make sense of the
problem on their own before intervening. When support is necessary, encourage the student to slow down
MP.1 and read each sentence carefully. During the Student Debrief, recognize students who have been successful
at persevering.
Students sit in the meeting area or at their tables with their personal white boards.
Problems 1 and 2: Compare with bigger or smaller unknown problem types with more or fewer suggesting
the correct operation.
T: Lets read our story together.
S/T: Ben played 9 songs on his banjo. Lee played 3 more songs than
Ben. How many songs did Lee play?
T: On your personal white board, draw and then write a number
sentence to match the story. (Circulate and observe students
solutions.)
S: (Draw and solve.)
T: (Choose a student who made a double tape diagram.) Tell us
how you drew your tape diagram.
S: First, I made Bens and Lees tapes to be equal, but I know thats not true. Lee played 3 more songs.
So I drew a more tape next to Lees tape and wrote a 3 in it. Then, I put 9 in Bens tape. I know Lees
first tape is 9 because its the same size as Bens tape. Lees tape is now 9 and 3. Thats 12 songs.
T: Excellent! What number sentence did we use to match the story?
S: 9 + 3 = 12.
T: What does the nine describe in the story and in our model? (Point.)
S: Bens songs.
305

T: The three? (Point.)

S: The extra songs Lee played. The 3 more songs of Lee.
T: The 12? (Point.)
S: How many songs Lee played.
T: Give me a statement answering the question.
S: Lee played 12 songs.
Repeat the process using the problem given below:
Nikil hopped on one leg 15 times in a row. Kim hopped 4 fewer times.
How many times did Kim hop on one leg?
Problem 3: Compare with smaller unknown problem type with more suggesting the incorrect operation.
T: Lets read our next story problem together.
S/T: Shanika went down the slide 15 times. She went down 3 more
times than Fran. How many times did Fran go down the slide?
T: Lets draw a double tape diagram since we need to find out
how many times Fran went down the slide.
T: (Write S and F, and draw same-size tapes as shown to the
right.) What do we need to ask ourselves first?
S: Who has more?
T: Yes! Read the story again carefully. (Wait.) Who has more?
Who went down the slide more times?
S: Shanika!
T: (Draw a more tape next to Shanikas first tape.) How many more?
S: 3 more!
T: (Write 3 in the more tape.) Lets go back to the story and read the first sentence.
S/T: Shanika went down the slide 15 times.
T: Where should we put the 15? Turn and talk to your partner.
S: We can put it in the first part of Shanikas tape.
T: Who agrees? Who disagrees? (Choose a student who disagrees.) Tell us why. (Demonstrate as the
student explains.)
S: If we put 15 in the first part of her tape, then it will show that Shanika went down the slide 18 times
because her tape will show 15 and 3.
T: Youre correct. That does not match the first sentence of our story problem, so where would we
write 15?
S: Draw the arms to include both parts of Shanikas tape. The whole tape is 15.
T: (Demonstrate.) Yes! That makes sense! Lets read the second sentence.
S/T: She went down 3 more times than Fran.
T: Did we take care of that in our drawing? How?
S: Yes! We added a more tape for Shanika and wrote 3 inside.
306

T: Lets read the last sentence.

S/T: How many times did Fran go down the slide?
T: Frans tape gets the question mark since thats the unknown. Turn and talk to your partner about
how you can solve Frans amount.
S: We know that the first part of Shanikas tape is equal to Frans tape, so we can just figure out
Shanikas first part. Thats easy to do. We know the total is 15, and one part is 3. 15 3 gives us
the other part. Its 12. Shanikas first part is 12, so Frans tape must be 12, too!
T: So, how many times did Fran go down the slide?
S: 12 times!
T: Take a moment to match the story to the model with your partner.
T: (Allow students sharing time.) What number sentence can we use to match this problem?
S: 15 3 = 12.
T: Tell your partner what each number in the sentence is telling about in the story, and then tell a
statement that answers the question.
S: (Discuss referents.) Shanika went down the slide 12 times.
Repeat the process using the problem below:
Martha picked up 15 rocks on the beach. She picked up 8 more than Peter. How many rocks did Peter pick
up at the beach?
Problem 4: Compare with bigger unknown problem type with fewer suggesting the incorrect operation.
T: Lets read the next story.
S/T: Anton caught 10 fireflies. He caught 7 fewer fireflies than
Julio. How many fireflies did Julio catch?
T: Set up your tape diagram so it shows who the characters are.
Make your tapes so they start out having the same amount.
S: (Draw two same-size tapes with labels A and J as shown to
the right.)
T: I love how you made each boy have equal-size tapes.
But is this true?
S: No! NOTES ON
T: We have to ask? MULTIPLE MEANS
S: Who has more! OF ACTION AND
T: Okay! Read carefully and find out who has more. EXPRESSION:
Then, add the more tape in your drawing. If students struggle with word
problems, consider using either smaller
S: (Develop the tape diagram as the teacher circulates
numbers or encouraging students to
and gives support.) include circle representations for the
T: (Select a student who showed 7 more for Julio.) objects and then drawing rectangles
S: I know that Julio has 7 more because the story said around the circles to create the tape
Anton caught 7 fewer fireflies, so I gave Julio the more diagrams.
tape and wrote 7 inside.
307

T: Excellent. Now that we have our tape diagram all set up, lets read the first sentence.
S/T: Anton caught 10 fireflies.
T: Decide where this information will go in your tape diagram.
S: (Write 10 in Antons tape.)
T: Read the next sentence.
S: He caught 7 fewer fireflies than Julio.
T: Check your tape diagram. Did we include this
information correctly?
S: Yes! NOTES ON
T: Explain to your partner how you showed this in your MULTIPLE MEANS
tape diagram. OF REPRESENTATION:
S: Anton caught 7 fewer fireflies, so that means Julio Some students may find it helpful to
caught 7 more. We added the more tape to Julios first use linking cubes to represent the
problems. Students can use different
tape.
color linking cubes for each part being
T: How many fireflies did Julio catch? Where does the represented and then draw the tape
question mark for the unknown go? diagrams to match their concrete
representations.
S: Under all of Julios tape! Draw arms to include both
parts.
T: How many fireflies did Julio catch? Go ahead and solve. Turn and talk to your partner about how
you got your answer.
S: (Solve and discuss.)
T: How did you find your answer?
S: I know that Julios first part is the same as Antons tape. Thats 10. Julio had 7 more. So, 10 + 7 = 17.
Julio caught 17 fireflies!
T: Excellent work. Im especially proud of how carefully you read to find out who had more in every
story.
Repeat the process using the following:
Darnel has 13 baseball cards. He has 4 fewer than Willie. How many baseball cards does Willie have?

308


lesson.
How was setting up your tape diagram for
Problem 4 different from Problem 5?
Why is it easier to use a double tape diagram
when we are comparing amounts?
Why is it important to read every part of the story
problem carefully? Give an example using your
Problem Set or from todays lesson.
Sometimes going slower when we do math
means we are getting smarter. Find an example
from your work today when you slowed down to
get a problem correct.

309

Name Date
Sample Tape Diagram
story.
1. Kiana wrote 3 poems. She wrote 7 fewer than her sister Emi. How many poems did
Emi write?
2. Maria used 14 beads to make a bracelet. Maria used 4 more beads than Kim.
How many beads did Kim use to make her bracelet?
3. Peter drew 19 rocket ships. Rose drew 5 fewer rocket ships than Peter. How many
rocket ships did Rose draw?
310

4. During the summer, Ben watched 9 movies. Lee watched 4 more movies than Ben.
How many movies did Lee watch?
5.
pack?
6. Willie painted 9 fewer pictures than Julio. Julio painted 16 pictures. How many
pictures did Willie paint?
311

Name Date
Sample Tape Diagram
Willie splashed in 7 more puddles after the rainstorm than Julio. Willie splashed in 11
puddles. How many puddles did Julio splash in after the rainstorm?
312

Name Date
Sample Tape Diagram
story.
1. Julio listened to 7 songs on the radio. Lee listened to 3 more songs than Julio.
How many songs did Lee listen to?
2. Shanika caught 14 ladybugs. She caught 4 more ladybugs than Willie. How many
ladybugs did Willie catch?
3. Rose packed 3 more boxes than her sister to move to their new house. Her sister
packed 11 boxes. How many boxes did Rose pack?
313

4. Tamra decorated 13 cookies. Tamra decorated 2 fewer cookies than Emi.

How many cookies did Emi decorate?
5.
How many tennis balls did Rose hit?
6. With his camera, Darnel took 5 more pictures than Kiana. He took 13 pictures.
How many pictures did Kiana take?
314

Lesson 26


Standards Check: Time 1.MD.3 (5 minutes)
Fluency Favorite or Standards Review (5 minutes)

Note: Give the appropriate Practice Set to each student. Students who completed all of the questions
correctly on their most recent Practice Set should be given the next level of difficulty. All other students
should try to improve their scores on their current levels.
Standards Check: Time (5 minutes)

Materials: (T/S) Personal white board, time recording sheet (Fluency Template)
Note: This review fluency provides an opportunity to monitor which students can tell and write time in hours
and half hours. When students draw hands for times to the half hour, make sure the hour hand is
approximately halfway between the numbers.
T: Draw hands on the templates analog clock to show times to the hour and half hour.
S: (Write the time on the digital clock, and fill in the appropriate sentence frame.)
T: Write times to the hour and half hour on the digital clock.
S: (Draw the hands on the analog clock, and fill in the appropriate sentence frame.)
315

Fluency Favorite or Standards Review (5 minutes)

Note: If needed, repeat one of the Standards Check fluency activities. If not, select a class favorite fluency
activity, or begin the Concept Development.
Materials: (S) Problem Set
Note: By working with double tape diagrams as related to the varying comparison problem types, students
have a way to approach any comparison problem.
How do we set up our story as a tape diagram?
Read carefully and determine who has more.
Is every part of the story represented in your tape diagram?
Suggested Delivery of Instruction for Solving Word Problems

1. Model the problem, calculate, and write a statement.
Choose two pairs of students to work on chart paper while the NOTES ON
others work independently or in pairs at their seats. Review the MULTIPLE MEANS
following questions before beginning the first problem: OF REPRESENTATION:
How do we set up our story into a double tape Encourage students who have difficulty
diagram? moving to the tape diagram
representation as the position of the
Read carefully. Who has more? unknown changes to draw a number
Is every part of the story represented in your tape bond as part of their work. Some
diagram? students more easily relate to the tape
diagram through its similarities with
As students work, circulate and support. Some students may number bonds.
feel stuck and struggle with choosing the appropriate method to
MP.1
use. Encourage and support them in learning to persevere and
make sense of the problems.
After three minutes, have the two pairs of students share their labeled diagrams. Allow students to briefly
question their peers until it is agreed the diagrams or drawings represent the story correctly. Then, give
everyone two to three minutes to finish work on that question. All students should write their equations and
statements of the answer.
2. Assess the solution for reasonableness.

Give all students one to two minutes to assess and explain the reasonableness of their solution to a partner.
For about one minute, have the demonstrating students receive and respond to feedback and questions from
their peers.
316

3. As a class, notice the ways the drawing depicts the story and the solution.
Ask questions to help students recognize how each part of their diagram matches the story and solution.
This helps students begin to see how the same process can help them solve varying word problems. Keep at
least one chart-paper sample of each solution for reference later in the lesson.
Problem 1 (Compare with difference unknown.)

Tony is reading a book with 16 pages. Maria is reading a book that has 10 pages. How much longer is Tonys
book than Marias book?
Note: After students have explained their tape diagram and solution accurately, point to sections of the tape
diagram, and ask the class questions such as, What does this part represent? How do you know?
For the next five problems, have only the students at the board share their work so that students have time
to work through and discuss all six problems. Choose one or two probing questions that support student
development, as needed.
Problem 2 (Compare with bigger unknown.)

NOTES ON
Shanika built a block tower using 14 blocks. Tamra built a tower MULTIPLE MEANS
by using 5 more blocks than Shanika. How many blocks did OF ACTION AND
Tamra use to build her tower?
EXPRESSION:
Note: For many children, Problem 2 is more challenging to If students do not have experience with
solve than Problem 1 because one of the sets being compared a context such as the one used in
(Tamras) has a missing part. Some students may quickly find an Problem 2, act out the problem with a
accurate solution from adding the two numbers (14 + 5) but few student volunteers before having
may not demonstrate understanding in their drawing. the class begin to draw and solve the
problem.
Darnel walked for 10 minutes to get to Kianas house. The next day, Kiana took a shortcut and walked to
Darnels house in 8 minutes. How much shorter in time was Kianas walk?
Note: Problem 3 brings students back to a compare with difference unknown problem type, which they
should be gaining confidence in solving. Celebrate the strategies students use to achieve such successes as a
motivator to continue persevering at problems they initially find challenging.
Problem 4 (Compare with smaller unknown.)

Lee read 16 pages in a book. Kim read 4 fewer pages in her book. How many pages did Kim read?
Note: Students sometimes struggle with the term fewer, making Problem 4 more challenging. Using
relatively small differences (such as 4) can support students in visualizing the problem and learning the
vocabulary.
Problem 5 (Compare with bigger unknown. More or fewer suggesting the incorrect operation.)
Nikils soccer team has 13 players. Nikil has 4 fewer players on his team than Roses team. How many players
are on Roses team?
317

Note: Problem 5 is challenging because fewer than

suggests the incorrect operation. Similar to Problem 4,
the small difference between the two team sizes
(4 players) is intentionally selected to support students in
working with this challenging problem type.
Problem 6 (Compare with smaller unknown. More or

fewer suggesting the incorrect operation.)
After dinner, Darnel washed 15 spoons. He washed 9
more spoons than forks. How many forks did Darnel
wash?
Note: Problem 6 uses more than, but students must
subtract to find the number of forks that were washed.
As a final problem, notice that the difference between the
two sets being compared is 9, a much larger difference
than used in the previous two problems.


Look at Problem 1. What did you draw? How did
your drawing help you solve the problem?
318

Look at Problem 3. How is your drawing similar or different from the drawing you made for
Problem 1?
Look at Problem 4. How was setting up your drawing similar to Problem 5? Explain your thinking.
Why is it important to read the stories carefully? When you see the words more than, does it always
mean you have to add to find your solution? Use examples from your Problem Set to support your
thinking.

319

Name Date
Sample Tape Diagram
story.
1. Tony is reading a book with 16 pages. Maria is reading a book that has 10 pages.
book?
2. Shanika built a block tower using 14 blocks. Tamra built a tower by using 5 more
blocks than Shanika. How many blocks did Tamra use to build her tower?
3. Darnel walked 10 minutes to get to

in time was
320

4. Lee read 16 pages in a book. Kim read 4 fewer pages in her book. How many pages
did Kim read?
5.
6.
How many forks did Darnel wash?
321

Name Date
Read the word problem. Sample Tape Diagram

story.
Maria jumped off the diving board into the pool 3 fewer times than Emi. Maria jumped
off the diving board 14 times. How many times did Emi jump off the diving board?
322

Name Date
Read the word problem. Sample tape diagram

story.
1.
?
2. Maria bought a basket with 13 strawberries in it. Darnel bought a basket with 4
it?
3. Tamra has 5 books checked out from the library. Kim has 11 books checked out
from the library. How many fewer books does Tamra have checked out than Kim?
323

4. Kiana picked 12 apples from the tree. She picked 6 fewer apples than Willie.
How many apples did Willie pick from the tree?
5. Emi found 16 rocks. She found 5 more rocks than Peter. How many
rocks did Peter find?
6. The first grade football team has 12 players. The first grade team has 6 fewer
players than the second grade team. How many players are on the second grade
team?
324

NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Lesson 26 Fluency Template 1 6
:
It is half past ___.
time recording sheet
325

Lesson 27
Objective: Share and critique peer strategies for solving problems of varied
types.


Standards Check: Shapes 1.G.1, 1.G.2 (8 minutes)

Materials: (S) Core Fluency Practice Sets (Lesson 1 Core Fluency Practice Sets)
score from the previous day. Consider having students clap once for each person standing to celebrate
improvement.
Standards Check: Shapes (8 minutes)

Materials: (T) Two-dimensional shape flashcards (Fluency Template 1), three-dimensional objects used in
Module 5 Lesson 3 (S) Personal white board, shapes recording sheet (Fluency Template 2)
Note: This activity reviews the attributes and names of two-dimensional and three-dimensional shapes.
Remember that a square is also a rectangle and a rhombus, and a cube is also a rectangular prism.
1. Invite students to look at their templates and to read the names of the two-dimensional shapes and
attributes with the teacher. Show a shape card or object. Students circle the name(s) of the shape
and complete the attributes section. Repeat for all two-dimensional shapes.
Lesson 27: Share and critique peer strategies for solving problems of varied types.
326

2. Invite students to look at their templates and to read the names of the three-dimensional shapes and
attributes with the teacher. Show a three-dimensional object. Students circle the name(s) of the
shape and complete the attributes section. Repeat for all three-dimensional shapes.
3. Show two- or three-dimensional shapes. Ask students to circle the other shapes that could be used, if
any, to create them.
Materials: (T) Chart paper (S) Problem Set
Students sit at the tables next to their partner with their Problem Sets.
Note: In todays lesson, students work on their Problem Set and solve the varied problem types they
encountered throughout the year. Selected pairs of students then discuss their methods for solving the
problems and explain their work. After they share, the whole class participates in a discussion as students
make comments and suggestions and ask each other questions.
How does your work or tape diagram help you solve the problem?
A compliment I could give you is?
MP.3 A question I have for you is?
One way you might improve your work would be?
Lets look for similarities and differences in our drawings and strategies.
Suggested Delivery of Instruction for Sharing and Critiquing Peer Strategies

1. Solve varied problem types using the RDW process.
For each story problem, invite two pairs of students to model
their work on chart paper while the others work independently NOTES ON
or in pairs. Choose new pairs for each problem, and consider MULTIPLE MEANS
selecting students who use varied strategies for solving. OF ENGAGEMENT:
Observe levels of student
As students work, circulate and provide support. Some
understanding, and select the most
students may feel stuck and struggle with picking the appropriate problem type to focus on
appropriate method or choosing between a single or a double during todays Concept Development.
tape diagram to use. Encourage and support them in learning
to persevere to make sense of the problems.
2. In partnerships, share and critique peer strategies.

Give students one to two minutes to explain their methods of solving and how they found their solution with
their partners or with another pair of students.
327

3. As a class and with partners, share and critique peer strategies.

For Problems 1 and 2, share and critique peer strategies as a class. For about one minute, have the
demonstrating students share their methods and explain their work. The rest of the class may raise
questions, and the presenters respond to feedback and questions from their peers. For the remaining
problems, have students share and critique with their partners using the chart with question frames. Finally,
all students return to their work and make improvements.
Problem 1 (Add to with change unknown.)

Nine letters came in the mail on Monday. Some more letters NOTES ON
were delivered on Tuesday. Then, there were 13 letters. How MULTIPLE MEANS
many letters were delivered on Tuesday? OF ACTION AND
EXPRESSION:
Note: Students have worked with this problem type throughout
If students struggle with computation,
the year. Some students may use addition to solve, while
use smaller numbers or numbers that
others use subtraction. It is important to see that different are close together so they can focus on
operations can be used as long as the story problem has been how to interpret and solve different
analyzed accurately. problem types.
Problem 2 (Take apart with addend unknown.)

Ben and Tamra found a total of 18 seeds in their watermelon slices. Ben found 7 seeds in his slice. How many
seeds did Tamra find?
Note: Like Problem 1, students may solve using addition or subtraction. Larger numbers are used within the
problem, which may also promote conversation about place value as students discuss their solution
strategies.
Problem 3 (Add to with start unknown.)

Some children were playing on the playground. Eight children came to join, and now there are 14 children.
How many children were on the playground in the beginning?
Note: Problem 3 is challenging because it begins with an unknown. If both members of a partnership are
struggling, remind them to read the story one sentence at a time and check that their drawing represents
each sentence. Students might use concrete manipulatives and then draw after they understand the
relationships within the problem.

Willie walked for 7 minutes. Peter walked for 14 minutes. How much shorter in time was Willies walk?
Note: This problem challenges students to notice that they are working with a comparison problem type.
Problem 5 (Compare with bigger unknown.)

Emi saw 12 ants walking in a row. Fran saw 6 more ants than Emi. How many ants did Fran see?
Note: Students must recognize that the second sentence in this story problem only gives part of the
necessary information to determine how many ants Fran saw. Support students with questions such as,
Who are the characters? Who saw more ants? What can you draw?
328

Problem 6 (Compare with smaller unknown.)

Shanika has 13 cents in her front pocket. She has 8 fewer
cents in her back pocket. How many cents does Shanika
have in her back pocket?
Note: Problem 6 presents some of the same challenges
as Problem 5, this time using the term fewer. Support
students with questions such as, Are you comparing, or
are you putting together? What are you comparing?
What can you draw?

Lesson Objective: Share and critique peer strategies for

solving problems of varied types.
the lesson.
Which problems did you and your partner find
challenging today? How did your discussion help
you to solve the problem or to improve your
strategies for solving the problem?
329

What were some of the similarities in the way you and your partner drew and solved the problems?
What were some of the differences?
How did seeing your partners work help improve your own work? Show your improvement to the
class.
What compliments did you give your partner about her work? Show the class an example of your
partners work.

330

Name Date
Sample Tape Diagram
story.
1. Nine letters came in the mail on Monday. Some more letters were delivered on
Tuesday. Then, there were 13 letters. How many letters were delivered on
Tuesday?
2. Ben and Tamra found a total of 18 seeds in their watermelon slices. Ben found
7 seeds in his slice. How many seeds did Tamra find?
3. Some children were playing on the playground. Eight children came to join, and now
there are 14 children. How many children were on the playground in the beginning?
331

4. Willie walked for 7 minutes. Peter walked for 14 minutes. How much shorter in
5. Emi saw 12 ants walking in a row. Fran saw 6 more ants than Emi. How many ants
did Fran see?
6. Shanika has 13 cents in her front pocket. She has 8 fewer cents in her back pocket.
How many cents does Shanika have in her back pocket?
332

Name Date
Sample Tape Diagram
story.
Emi tried on 8 fewer costumes than Nikil. Emi tried on 4 costumes. How many
costumes did Nikil try on?
333

Name Date
Sample Tape Diagram
1. Eight students lined up to go to art. Some more lined up to go to music. Then,

there were 12 students in line. How many students lined up to go to music?
2. Peter rode his bike 5 blocks. Rose rode her bike 13 blocks. How much shorter was
?
3. Lee and Anton collected 16 leaves on their walk. Nine of the leaves .
How many leaves ?
334

4. The team counted 11 soccer balls inside the net. They counted 5 fewer soccer balls
outside of the net. How many soccer balls were outside of the net?
5. Julio saw 14 cars drive by his house. Julio saw 6 more cars than Shanika. How many
cars did Shanika see?
6. Some students were eating lunch. Four students joined them. Now, there are
17 students eating lunch. How many students were eating lunch in the beginning?
335

NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Lesson 27 Fluency Template 1 1 6
two-dimensional shape flashcards
336

337

338

339

2-D SHAPES 3-D SHAPES
circle sphere
triangle cone
rectangle cylinder
rhombus rectangular prism
square cube
trapezoid
hexagon
____ corners ____ corners

____ square corners ____ faces
____ sides ____ straight edges
Are all sides the same length? Are all faces the same shape?
yes no yes no
shapes recording sheet
340

NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM End-of-Module Assessment Task 16
Name Date
1. Use the RDW process to solve the following problems. Write the statement on the
line.
a. Tamra has 12 coins. Willie has 8 coins. How many more coins does Tamra have
than Willie?
______________________________________________.
b. 16 coins are on the table. 11 of them are pennies, and the rest are dimes.
How many dimes are there?
______________________________________________.
c. Peter has 6 fewer coins than Nikil. Nikil has 9 coins. How many coins does Peter
have?
______________________________________________.

7/17/15 341

2. Fill in the missing numbers in each sequence:

a. 115, 116, _____, _____, _____, 120 b. _____, 101, _____, 99, _____
3. Use the word bank to write the number and value of each coin.
Coin Names Coin Values

nickel dime 1 cent 5 cents
quarter penny 10 cents 25 cents
_______________________ _______________________
_______________________ _______________________
_______________________ _______________________
_______________________ _______________________

342

4. Mark says that 87 is the same as 7 tens 17 ones. Suki says that 87 is the same as
8 tens 7 ones. Are they correct? Explain your thinking.
a. 6 tens 42 ones b. 69 75
c. 75 6 tens 15 ones d. 8 tens 14 ones 7 tens 4 ones
6. Find the mystery numbers. Explain how you know the answers.
a. 10 more than 89 is _______. b. 10 less than 89 is _______.
8 9 8 9
c. 1 more than 89 is _______. d. 1 less than 89 is ________.
8 9 8 9

343

7. Solve for each unknown number. Use the space provided to draw quick tens, a
number bond, or the arrow way to show your work. You may use your kit of ten-
sticks if needed.
a. 90 + 3 = ____ b. 50 + 40 = ____ c. 80 30 = ____
d. 100 ____ = 40 e. 78 + 6 = ____ f. 47 + 40 = ____
g. 65 + 34 = ____ h. 75 + 25 = ____ i. 47 + 36 = ____

344

End-of-Module Assessment Task Topics AF

Standards Addressed
Represent and solve problems involving addition and subtraction.
1.OA.1 Use addition and subtraction within 20 to solve word problems involving situations of adding
to, taking from, putting together, taking apart, and comparing, with unknowns in all
positions, e.g., by using objects, drawings, and equations with a symbol for the unknown
number to represent the problem. (See CCSS-M Glossary, Table 1.)
1.NBT.1 Count to 120, starting at any number less than 120. In this range, read and write numerals
and represent a number of objects with a written numeral.
Understand place value.
1.NBT.2 Understand that the two digits of a two-digit number represent amounts of tens and ones.
Understand the following as special cases:
1.NBT.3 Compare two two-digit numbers based on meanings of the tens and ones digits, recording the
results of comparisons with the symbols >, =, and <.
Use place value understanding and properties of operations to add and subtract.
1.NBT.4 Add within 100, including adding a two-digit number and a one-digit number, and adding a
two-digit number and a multiple of 10, using concrete models or drawings and strategies
based on place value, properties of operations, and/or the relationship between addition and
Understand that in adding two-digit numbers, one adds tens and tens, ones and ones; and
sometimes it is necessary to compose a ten.
1.NBT.5 Given a two-digit number, mentally find 10 more or 10 less than the number, without having
to count; explain the reasoning used.
1.NBT.6 Subtract multiples of 10 in the range 1090 from multiples of 10 in the range 1090 (positive
or zero differences), using concrete modules or drawings and strategies based on place value,
properties of operations, and/or the relationship between addition and subtraction; relate the
strategy to a written method and explain the reasoning used.
Tell and write time and money. 1
1.MD.3 Tell and write time in hours and half-hours using analog and digital clocks. Recognize and
identify coins, their names, and their value.
1Focus on money.

345

Evaluating Student Learning Outcomes

A Progression Toward Mastery is provided to describe steps that illuminate the gradually increasing
understandings that students develop on their way to proficiency. In this chart, this progress is presented
from left (Step 1) to right (Step 4). The learning goal for students is to achieve Step 4 mastery. These steps
are meant to help teachers and students identify and celebrate what the students CAN do now and what they
need to work on next.
Assessment STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4

Task Item Little evidence of Evidence of some Evidence of some Evidence of solid
reasoning without reasoning without reasoning with a reasoning with a
a correct answer. a correct answer. correct answer or correct answer.
evidence of solid
reasoning with an
incorrect answer.
(1 Point) (2 Points) (3 Points) (4 Points)

1 Students answers are Students answers are Students answers are Student correctly:
incorrect, and there is incorrect, but there is correct, but the Solves each word
1.OA.1 no evidence of evidence of reasoning. responses are problem.
reasoning. For example, the incomplete (e.g., may
a. Tamra has 4
student is able to write be missing labels for
more coins than
a number sentence. the drawing, an
Willie.
addition sentence, or
an explanation). b. There are
The students work is 5 dimes on the
essentially strong. table.
c. Peter has
3 coins.
Demonstrates
understanding of
the problem
situation through
drawing/modeling.
2 Student is unable to Student completes at Student completes at Student identifies all

complete any sequence least part of one least one sequence as numbers in the
of numbers. sequence. well as at least one sequences:
1.NBT.1 number in the 115, 116, 117, 118,
additional sequence. 119, 120
102, 101, 100, 99,
98

346

3 Student is unable to Student accurately Student accurately Student correctly

match more than two matches at least three matches one set of matches the image,
coins with either the elements within the set coin information with name, and value of
1.MD.3 proper name or the but mixes the value or another set but mixes each coin:
proper value. the names for more either the value or the Dime, 10 cents
than one pair of coins. name of one pair of
Penny, 1 cent
coins.
Nickel, 5 cents
Quarter, 25 cents
4 Student demonstrates Student uses drawings Student demonstrates Student correctly uses
little to no or words to accurately some understanding of drawings or words that
1.NBT.2 understanding of depict at least one of using place value to depict place value to
comparing numbers the two numbers, compare numbers but accurately explain that
based on tens and demonstrating limited does not fully explain 87 is the same as both
ones, answering understanding of the reasoning using place 7 tens 17 ones and
incorrectly. There is no use of place value to value. 8 tens 7 ones.
evidence of reasoning. compare numbers. OR
Student answers
incorrectly because of
an error such as
transcription but
demonstrates strong
understanding of place
value through drawing
or words.
5 Student is unable to Student has limited Student has some Student answers:
use symbols to ability to use symbols ability to use symbols a. >
compare numbers and to compare numbers, to compare numbers,
1.NBT.2 b. <
is unable to correctly correctly answering correctly answering
answer any of the four one of the four two or three of the c. =
1.NBT.3
comparisons. comparisons. four comparisons. d. >

347

6 Student demonstrates Student demonstrates Student demonstrates Student identifies 99,

little or no limited understanding the ability to mentally 79, 90, and 88, and
understanding of of mentally adding or add or subtract 10, accurately completes
1.NBT.5 mentally adding or subtracting 10, correctly identifying the charts to depict the
subtracting 10. identifying at least two four mystery numbers arrow way.
Answers are incorrect, correct mystery but reasoning is
and there is no numbers but does not unclear because no
evidence of reasoning. complete any charts charts have been
accurately. completed accurately.
OR
Student accurately
completes the charts
but makes an error in
mental calculation on
one or two of (a), (b),
(c), or (d.)
7 Student answers two Student answers at Student answers at Student correctly:

or fewer questions least three of nine least six of nine Solves
1.NBT.4 correctly. correctly and correctly or uses a a. 93
demonstrates sound process
b. 90
1.NBT.6 misunderstandings of throughout with
c. 50
place value. calculation errors.
d. 60
e. 84
f. 87
g. 99
h. 100
i. 83
Represents the
process to
accurately solve
through drawings,
number bonds, or
the arrow way.
The notation
demonstrates the
use of a sound
strategy for adding
or subtracting.

348


349


350


351


352

1
GRADE
GRADE 1 MODULE 6
Topic G
Culminating Experiences
Focus Standard: Topic G is a celebration of students learning over the course of the year. Focus
Standards are not applicable.
Topic G culminates not only Module 6, but also a full year of learning for Grade 1 students. It is a joyous
celebration of the great progress of all students. During each lesson, students recognize how much they
know now in comparison with the start of the year. They celebrate this learning by using their acquired skills
and knowledge to enjoy entertaining games and activities with their peers.
During Lessons 28 and 29, students play games with cards and dice that celebrate their progress in fluently
adding and subtracting within 10 and 20. All of the games are played with materials that students can find at
home or bring home from school to encourage engaging summer practice.
To culminate the year, students create folder covers that can be used to bring home the math work from the
year. The covers are designed to illustrate students learning across the course of the year and to celebrate
their individual accomplishments.
A Teaching Sequence Toward Mastery of Culminating Experiences

Objective 1: Celebrate progress in fluency with adding and subtracting within 10 (and 20). Organize
engaging summer practice.
(Lessons 2829)
Objective 2: Create folder covers for work to be taken home illustrating the years learning.
(Lesson 30)
Topic G: Culminating Experiences

353

Lesson 28
Objective: Celebrate progress in fluency with adding and subtracting

Culminating Activity (35 minutes)
Sprint: Count Dots K.CC.5 (10 minutes)
Sprint: Count Dots (10 minutes)

Materials: (S) Count Dots Sprint
Note: This Sprint is the one students completed on the first day of school. Repeating it in the final days of
school will likely bring students joy as they recognize the ease with which they are able to do it after a year of
mathematical growth. Be sure to assign a counting sequence for early finishers!
Darnel answered 30 problems on Side B of his Count Dots Sprint today. He was proud because he answered
20 more problems today than he did on the first day of school. How many problems did he answer on the
first day of school?
Note: This compare with smaller unknown problem challenges students by suggesting the wrong operation.
Lesson 28: Celebrate progress in fluency with adding and subtracting within 10
(and 20). Organize engaging summer practice. 354

Materials: (T) Organizational chart for center

assignments (example to the right)
(S) Numeral cards (Template 1), Target
Practice (Template 2), Race to the Top
(Template 3), personal white board, die
Note: In the next two lessons, students revisit some of

their favorite fluency activities from the year to celebrate
and reflect on their progress.
Take the steps listed below to prepare for the culminating
activity:
Choose from the suggested activities, or select
other fluency favorites based on the needs and
interests of the class.
Prepare materials and stations.
On the Problem Set, before making copies for
todays lesson, write the names of the activities
selected. (See the picture to the right.) This is an
opportunity for students to reflect on their
progress.
Note: Students work with these centers again tomorrow
as a host to guests who might be parents, support
teachers, or kindergarten buddies.
T: Today, we are going to celebrate our fluency
progress. Think about the fluency activities we
did this year. Which were your favorites?
T: How did they help you improve your counting,
adding, and subtracting skills? Share your
ideas with your partner. NOTES ON
S: Happy Counting helped me count forward and MULTIPLE MEANS
backward. Sprints helped me with addition and OF ENGAGEMENT:
subtraction facts. Coin drops helped with counting
It is important to provide students with
on. the math tools they need to play these
T: Great! Today, I have some of those activities set up at games successfully. Support students
centers. You will start at one center and rotate at my with the use of manipulatives and
signal to the other centers. Review instructions for possibly their personal white boards.
each center and assign partners. Students spend
about five minutes at each center.

Choose from the fluency celebration centers suggested below. Set up the number of centers that works best
for the class.
Missing Part: Make Ten

Materials: (S) Numeral cards (Template 1)
Each partner holds a card up to his or her forehead. The partner tells how many more are needed to make
ten. Students must guess the cards on their foreheads. Partners can play simultaneously, each putting a card
to his or her forehead.
Target Practice
Materials: (S) Personal white boards with Target Practice (Template 2), die per pair
Follow the directions on the game board.
Race to the Top

Materials: (S) Personal white boards with Race to the Top (Template 3), 2 dice per pair
Partners take turns rolling the dice, saying an addition sentence and recording the sums on the graph.
The game ends when time runs out or one of the columns reaches the top of the graph.
Subtraction with Cards

Materials: (S) Numeral cards (Template 1)
Partners combine their numeral cards and place them face down between them.
If the differences are equal, the cards are set aside, and the winner of the next round keeps the
cards from both rounds.
When all of the cards have been used, the player with the most cards wins.
Number Bond Addition and Subtraction

Materials: (S) Personal white boards, die per pair
Allow partners to choose a number less than 20 for their whole

and roll the die to determine one of the parts.
Both students write two addition and two subtraction
sentences with a square for the unknown number in
each equation and solve for the missing number.
They then exchange boards and check each others work.

Make Ten Addition and Take from Ten Subtraction with Partners
Materials: (S) Personal white boards
Partners alternate practicing the make ten and take from ten strategies.
Make Ten Addition:

Partners choose an addend for each other from 1 to 10.
On their personal boards, students add their number to 9, 8, and 7. Remind students to write the
two addition sentences they learned in Module 2.
Partners then exchange boards and check each others work.
Take from Ten Subtraction:

Partners choose a minuend for each other between 10 and 20.
On their personal white boards, students subtract 9, 8, and 7 from their number. Remind students
to write the two number sentences (e.g., to solve 13 8, they write 10 8 = 2, 2 + 3 = 5).
Partners then exchange boards and check each others work.
Analogous Addition Sentences STEP 1
Materials: (S) Personal white board, dice Partner A Partner B

4 3
Step 1: Each partner rolls a die and writes the number rolled. 14 13
They then make a list, adding 1 ten to their number on each 24 23
new line up to 3 tens. (See the diagram to the right.) 34 33
Step 2: Students write equations, adding the number on their
partners die to each line. STEP 2
Partners exchange boards and check each others work. Partner A Partner B
Note: This game can be modified by using dice that have more than 6 4 + 3 = 7 3+4 = 7
sides. Students should be ready to add numbers to 20 and add 14 + 3 = 17 13 + 4 = 17
multiples of 10 to these numbers. 24 + 3 = 27 23 + 4 = 27
34 + 3 = 37 33 + 4 = 37

Lesson Objective: Celebrate progress in fluency with adding and subtracting within 10 (and 20). Organize
engaging summer practice.
Invite students to review their center work today. They should reflect on their work with a partner before
sharing as a class. Guide students in a conversation to debrief the centers and reflect on their learning.
What is something you did today that you could not do
before you came to first grade?
NOTES ON
Which of todays centers seemed easy? How does
MULTIPLE MEANS
your experience today compare with the first time you
did them? OF REPRESENTATION:
Teachers should feel a sense of pride
Are there any activities that were still a little
as they see their students demonstrate
challenging? What might you do to get better? strategies to make math easy. It is also
Which of these games might be fun to play over the exciting when students are able to
summer so you can keep your math skills sharp? explain how they are thinking and
relate concepts to one another.
Exit Ticket
Note: There is no Exit Ticket for this lesson.

NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Lesson 28 Sprint 1 6
Number Correct:
A
Name Date
*Write the number of dots. Try to find ways to group the dots to make counting easier!
1. 16.
2. 17.
3. 18.
4. 19.
5. 20.
6. 21.
7. 22.
8. 23.
9. 24.
10. 25.
11. 26.
12. 27.
13. 28.
14. 29.
15. 30.

NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Lesson 28 Sprint 1 6
Number Correct:
B
Name Date
*Write the number of dots. Try to find ways to group the dots to make counting easier!
1. 16.
2. 17.
3. 18.
4. 19.
5. 20.
6. 21.
7. 22.
8. 23.
9. 24.
10. 25.
11. 26.
12. 27.
13. 28.
14. 29.
15. 30.

Name Date
1. Circle the smiley face that shows your level of fluency for each activity.
I can complete,
I still need some
Activity but I still have I am fluent.
practice.
some questions.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2. Which activity helped you the most in becoming fluent with your facts to 10?

Name Date
1. Teach a family member some of our counting activities. Check all the activities you
do together.
Happy Count by ones.

Happy Count by tens.
Count by ones the Say Ten Way.
Count by tens the Say Ten Way. First, start at 0; then, start at 7.
Movement countingcount while doing squats, arm rolls, jumping jacks, etc.
2. Write the numbers from 91 to 120:
91 93
105
119
3. Count backward by tens from 97 to 7.
97, ____, 77, ____, ____, ____, ____, ____, ____, ____.
4. On the back of your paper, write as many sums and differences within 20 as you can.
Circle the ones that were hard for you at the beginning of the year!

NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Lesson 28 Template 1 1 6
0 1 2 3
4 5 6 7
8 9 10 10
10 5 5
numeral cards

Target Number:
Target Practice
Choose a target number between 6 and 10, and write it in the middle of the circle on
the top of the page. Roll a die. Write the number rolled in the circle at the end of
-eye by writing the number needed to make
your target in the other circle.
target practice

Name Date
Race to the Top!
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
race to the top

Lesson 29
Objective: Celebrate progress in fluency with adding and subtracting

Number Bond Dash: 10 1.OA.6 (3 minutes)
Number Bond Dash: 10 (3 minutes)

Materials: (S) Number Bond Dash: 10 (Pattern Sheet)
Note: In Module 1, students used the Number Bond Dash to build fluency with decompositions to 10. Doing
it today will likely bring students joy as they realize the ease with which they complete an activity that was
once a challenge.
In October, Tamras best score on the Number Bond Dash was 15 problems. Today, she correctly answered
10 more problems. What was Tamras score today?
Note: This add to with result unknown problem ties into todays Fluency Celebration. Students likely relate to
Tamra because they have just recognized their own improvement on the Number Bond Dash.

Materials: (S) Various fluency activities for center work
Note: Choose one of the following two options.

1. Invite parents, buddies from a kindergarten class, support
staff, or another audience to the Fluency Celebration. Set up
NOTES ON
the same fluency centers selected yesterday. Empower
MULTIPLE MEANS
students to teach activities to their guests. Students can
either host one station or travel with a group as a guide. OF REPRESENTATION:
During the Fluency Celebration, be
2. Replace some of yesterdays centers with different sure to assign partners suitably
suggested Fluency Celebration centers or other fluency matched for the games played. Some
favorites based on the needs and interests of the class. partners are better when matched by
ability, and others may work better
T: Welcome to our Fluency Celebration. Today the class
with one stronger student.
will show you some of the fluency activities we have
worked on this year.
Circulate as students teach the fluency games to their invited guests.

NOTES ON
Lesson Objective: Celebrate progress in fluency with adding MULTIPLE MEANS
and subtracting within 10 (and 20). Organize engaging summer OF ACTION AND
practice. EXPRESSION:
The Student Debrief is intended to invite reflection and active Giving students an opportunity to
processing of the total lesson experience. share and teach their favorite games
empowers them at the end of their
Invite students to review their center work today. They should year. Celebrate English language
reflect on their work with a partner before sharing as a class. learners as they use the language they
Guide students in a conversation to debrief the centers and have been learning in class all year to
reflect on their learning. explain their thinking.
Any combination of the questions below may be used to lead

the discussion.
What is something you did today that you could not do before you came to first grade?
What did you do to teach your guests the activities? Which ones were more difficult for them?
Why do you think everyone says that when you teach something to someone else, you remember it
much better?
Are there any activities that were still a little challenging? What might you do to get better?
Which of these games might be fun to play over the summer so you can keep your math skills sharp?

NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Lesson 29 Pattern Sheet 1 6
Name Date
Number Bond Dash!

Directions: Do as many as you can in 90 seconds.
Write the amount you finished here:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
10 10 10 10 10
10 9 8 9 10
6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
10 10 10 10 10
9 8 7 8 7
11. 12. 13. 14. 15.
10 10 10 10 10
6 7 6 5 4
16. 17. 18. 19. 20.
10 10 10 10 10
6 4 3 4 3
21. 22. 23. 24. 25.
10 10 10 10 10
0 1 2 4 2

Lesson 30
Objective: Create folder covers for work to be taken home illustrating the
years learning.

Note: Today is intended to be an opportunity for closure and reflection. There is no Fluency Practice or
Application Problem today.
Materials: (T) White pocket folder (S) White pocket folders, crayons, colored pencils or markers,
2 envelopes
Note: If white pocket folders are not available, manila file folders or 18" 24" white paper can be used to
make folders.
T: What are some of the math concepts we learned this year?
S: Addition and subtraction!
T: What can we draw on our folders to remember these concepts?
S: Number sentences! 5-group drawings! Number bonds!
T: (Model a drawing that represents addition and subtraction. Circulate as students represent addition
and subtraction on their folders.)
T: What are some other concepts we have learned?
S: Tens and ones!
T: What can we draw on our folders to represent tens and ones?
S: Dimes and pennies! Place value charts! Quick tens and ones! Tens-sticks and cubes!
Adding where we lined up tens with tens and ones with ones!
Continue this sequence of questions and prompts as students review the important concepts they have
learned throughout Grade 1. These should include measurement, data, three-dimensional shapes,
two-dimensional shapes, and word problems. When the folders are complete, they can be used to send
home summer packet directions, supplies, and completed work from Grade 1 that represents student
learning.
Lesson 30: Create folder covers for work to be taken home illustrating the years
learning. 369

Summer Packet Should Include:

Lesson 30 Summer Packet. (Summer Packet is found at the end of this lesson.)
Single-sided numeral or 5-group cards. (Consider sending home the set used by the student during
the school year or a template to cut new cards from Lesson 28.)
5 Core Fluency Sprints. (Other Grade 1 Sprints may also be selected based on the needs of
students.)
Core Fluency Differentiated Practice Sets.
Lesson Objective: Create folder covers for work to be taken home illustrating the years learning.
Invite students to review their work today. They should reflect on their learning throughout the year by
sharing their illustration with a partner before sharing as a class. Guide students in a conversation to debrief
their reflections.
What drawing did you make to represent addition and subtraction? Why did you choose this
drawing?
How did you show that addition and subtraction are related?
What shapes did you draw?
As I circulated, I saw lots of drawings: number bonds, place value charts, tape diagrams, 5-groups,
and quick tens. How do you think some of these pictures have helped you to understand math this
year?
How did you show your learning about word problems?
What do you think you are going to learn next year in second grade?
learning. 370

NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Lesson 30 Summer Packet 16
Name Date
Complete a math activity each day. Color the box for each day you do the suggested activity.
Summer Math Review: Weeks 15

Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday
Count from 87 to Play Addition Use your tangram Use quick tens Complete
Week 1
120 and back. with Cards. pieces to make a and ones to a Sprint.
Fourth of July draw 76.
picture.
Do counting Play Subtraction Make a graph of the Solve 36 + 57. Complete

squats. Count with Cards. types of fruits in Draw a picture a Sprint.
Week 2
from 45 to 60 and your kitchen. What to show your

back the Say Ten did you find out thinking.
Way. from your graph?
Write numbers Play Target Measure a table Use real coins Complete
from 37 to as Practice or with spoons and or draw coins to a Sprint.
Week 3
high as you can in Shake Those then with forks. show as many
one minute, while Disks for 9 and Which did you need ways to make
whisper-counting 10. more of? Why? 25 cents as you
the Say Ten Way. can.
Do jumping jacks Play Race and Go on a shape Use quick tens Complete
as you count up by Roll Addition or scavenger hunt. and ones to a Sprint.
Week 4
tens to 120 and Addition with Find as many draw 45 and 54.
back down to 0. Cards. rectangles or Circle the
rectangular prisms greater
as you can. number.
Write the Play Race and Measure the route Add 5 tens to Complete
numbers from 75 Roll Subtraction from your bathroom 23. Add 2. a Sprint.
to 120. or Subtraction to your bedroom. What number
Week 5
with Cards. Walk heel to toe, did you find?

and count your
steps.
learning. 371

Name Date
Complete a math activity each day. Color the box for each day you do the suggested activity.
Summer Math Review: Weeks 610

Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday
Count by ones Play Missing Write a story problem Solve 64 + 38. Complete
from 112 to 82. Part for 7. for 9 + 4. Draw a picture a Core
Week 6
Then, count to show your Fluency

from 82 to 112. thinking. Practice
Set.
Do counting Play Race and Graph the colors of Draw 14 cents Complete
squats. Count Roll Addition or all your pants. What with dimes and a Core
Week 7
down from 99 Addition with did you find out from pennies. Draw Fluency
to 75 and back Cards. your graph? 10 more cents. Practice
up the Say Ten What coins did Set.
Way. you use?
Write the Play Missing Write a story problem Use quick tens Complete
numbers from Part for 8. for and ones to a Core
Week 8
116 to as low as draw 76. Draw Fluency

7 + ___ = 12.
you can in one dimes and Practice
minute. pennies to show Set.
59 cents.
Do jumping Play Race and Go on a shape Use quick tens Complete
jacks as you Roll scavenger hunt. Find and ones to a Core
Week 9
count up by tens Subtraction or as many circles or draw 89 and 84. Fluency

from 9 to 119 Subtraction spheres as you can. Circle the Practice
and back down with Cards. number that is Set.
to 9. less.
Write numbers Play Target Measure the steps Solve 47 + 24. Complete
from 82 to as Practice or from your bedroom to Draw a picture a Core
Week 10
high as you can Shake Those the kitchen, walking to show your Fluency
in one minute, Disks for 6 heel to toe, and then thinking. Practice
while whisper and 7. have a family member Set.
counting the do the same thing.
Say Ten Way. Compare.
learning. 372

Addition (or Subtraction) with Cards

Materials: 2 sets of numeral cards 010
Shuffle the cards, and place them face down between the two players.
Each partner flips over two cards and adds them together or subtracts the smaller number from the
larger one.
The partner with the largest sum or smallest difference keeps the cards played by both players in
that round.
If the sums or differences are equal, the cards are set aside, and the winner of the next round keeps
the cards from both rounds.
When all the cards have been used, the player with the most cards wins.
Sprint
Materials: Sprint (Sides A and B)
Do as many problems on Side A as you can in one minute. Then, try to see if you can improve your
score by answering even more of the problems on Side B in a minute.
Target Practice
Materials: 1 die
Choose a target number to practice (e.g., 10).

Roll the die, and say the other number needed to hit the target. For example, if you roll 6, say 4,
because 6 and 4 make ten.
Shake Those Disks

Materials: Pennies
The amount of pennies needed depends on the number being practiced. For example, if students are
practicing sums for 10, they need 10 pennies.
Shake your pennies, and drop them on the table.
Say two addition sentences that add together the heads and tails. (For example, if they see 7 heads
and 3 tails, they would say 7 + 3 = 10 and 3 + 7 = 10.)
Challenge: Say four addition sentences instead of two. (For example, 10 = 7 + 3, 10 = 3 + 7, 7 + 3 =
10, and 3 + 7 = 10.)
learning. 373

Race and Roll Addition (or Subtraction)

Materials: 1 die
Addition
Both players start at 0.
They each roll a die and then say a number sentence adding the number rolled to their total.
(For example, if a players first roll is 5, the player says 0 + 5 = 5.)
They continue rapidly rolling and saying number sentences until someone gets to 20 without going
over. (For example, if a player is at 18 and rolls 5, the player would continue rolling until she
gets a 2.)
The first player to 20 wins.
Subtraction
Both players start at 20.
They each roll a die and then say a number sentence subtracting the number rolled from their total.
(For example, if a players first roll is 5, the player says 20 5 = 15.)
They continue rapidly rolling and saying number sentences until someone gets to 0 without going
over. (For example, if a player is at 5 and rolls 6, the player would continue rolling until she gets a 5.)
The first player to 0 wins.
learning. 374

1
GRADE
GRADE 1 MODULE 6
Answer Key
GRADE 1 MODULE 6
Place Value, Comparison, Addition and Subtraction to 100

375
This work is licensed under a

2015 Great Minds. eureka-math.org Creative Commons Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 3.0 Unported License.
G1-M6-TE-1.3.0-06.2015
NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Lesson 1 Answer Key 16
Lesson 1
Core Fluency Practice
Set A
1. 6 11. 8 21. 8
2. 6 12. 8 22. 9
3. 6 13. 6 23. 10
4. 6 14. 7 24. 10
5. 7 15. 8 25. 8
6. 7 16. 9 26. 7
7. 8 17. 10 27. 10
8. 7 18. 9 28. 9
9. 7 19. 9 29. 10
10. 6 20. 10 30. 9
Set B
1. 0 11. 3 21. 3
2. 6 12. 4 22. 4
3. 1 13. 5 23. 5
4. 2 14. 4 24. 6
5. 7 15. 2 25. 7
6. 1 16. 3 26. 8
7. 6 17. 4 27. 7
8. 1 18. 2 28. 6
9. 7 19. 3 29. 5
10. 2 20. 4 30. 6

376

2015 Great Minds. eureka-math.org
Set C
1. 1 11. 3 21. 4
2. 5 12. 3 22. 4
3. 5 13. 2 23. 3
4. 1 14. 2 24. 3
5. 9 15. 3 25. 4
6. 1 16. 3 26. 4
7. 5 17. 2 27. 3
8. 5 18. 2 28. 3
9. 2 19. 3 29. 3
10. 2 20. 3 30. 3
Set D
1. 6 11. 3 21. 4
2. 5 12. 4 22. 5
3. 6 13. 6 23. 3
4. 7 14. 2 24. 4
5. 4 15. 4 25. 5
6. 5 16. 6 26. 4
7. 7 17. 5 27. 3
8. 0 18. 1 28. 2
9. 1 19. 2 29. 3
10. 3 20. 2 30. 2

377

Set E
1. 6 11. 4 21. 3
2. 4 12. 4 22. 5
3. 3 13. 2 23. 3
4. 7 14. 2 24. 7
5. 2 15. 2 25. 2
6. 7 16. 3 26. 7
7. 3 17. 4 27. 2
8. 4 18. 2 28. 3
9. 9 19. 6 29. 5
10. 5 20. 2 30. 3
Problem Set
1. 6
2. 6
3. 5
4. 6
Exit Ticket
5
Homework
1. 3
2. 10
3. 6
4. 4

378

Lesson 2
Problem Set
1. 8
2. 9
3. 4
4. 6
5. 20
6. 6
Exit Ticket
8
Homework
1. 5
2. 9
3. 11
4. 15
5. 10
6. 17

379

Lesson 3
Problem Set
1. 4, 3; 4, 3 9. a. 4, 0
2. 8, 6; 86, 8, 6 b. 4, 6
c. 59
3. 7, 8; 78
d. 95
4. 8, 7; 87
e. 7, 5
5. 9, 6; 96 f. 7, 0
6. 10, 0; 100 g. 6, 0
7. 7, 3; 73 h. 80
8. 5, 4; 54 i. 55
j. 100
Exit Ticket
1. 8, 9; 89
2. a. 9, 0
b. 87
Homework
1. 5, 2; 5, 2 9. a. 7, 0
2. 9, 8; 98, 9, 8 b. 7, 6
c. 49
3. 9, 7; 97
d. 94
4. 5, 9; 59
e. 6, 5
5. 10, 0; 100 f. 6, 0
6. 8, 6; 86 g. 9, 0
7. 6, 7; 67 h. 100
8. 7, 5; 75 i. 83
j. 80

380

Lesson 4
Problem Set
1. 40, 3, 43; 43; 43 8. 8, 6; 86, 80, 6; 6, 8, 86
2. 40, 6, 46; 46; 46 9. 7, 4; 70, 4, 74; 7, 4, 74
3. 50, 7, 57; 50; 7; 57 10. 10; 100, 0, 100; 10, 0, 100
4. 70, 5, 75; 70, 5; 75 11. a. 56
5. 60, 8, 68; 60, 8, 68; 6, 8, 68 b. 80
c. 6
6. 90, 2, 92; 90, 2, 92; 9, 2, 92
d. 89
7. 7, 4; 74, 70, 4; 4, 7, 74
Exit Ticket
1. 8, 9; 80, 9, 89; 8, 9, 89
2. a. 92
b. 9
Homework
1. 70, 6, 76; 76; 76 8. 6, 8; 68, 60, 8; 8, 6, 68
2. 40, 5, 45; 45; 45 9. 7, 5; 70, 5, 75; 7, 5, 75
3. 60, 9, 69; 60, 9; 69 10. 9; 90, 0, 90; 9, 0, 90
4. 90, 7, 97; 90, 7; 97 11. a. 86
5. 80, 4, 84; 80, 4, 84; 8, 4, 84 b. 50
c. 5
6. 50, 8, 58; 50, 8, 58; 5, 8, 58
d. 84
7. 5, 6; 56, 50, 6; 6, 5, 56

381

Lesson 5
Problem Set
1. a. 69; 1 cube drawn 5. a. 11
b. 78; 1 ten-stick drawn b. 51
c. 61; 1 ten-stick crossed off c. 50
d. 69; 1 cube crossed off d. 79
2. a. 69; 6, 9 e. 99
b. 58; 5, 9, , 5, 8 6. a. 10
b. 50
c. 60; 5, 9, , 6, 0
c. 64
d. 49; 5, 9, , 4, 9 d. 71
3. a. 11 e. 90
b. 71 7. a. 43
c. 77 b. 86
d. 80 c. 70
e. 100 d. 64
4. a. 20 e. 70
b. 70 f. 50
c. 71 g. 75
d. 88 h. 79
e. 100 i. 100
j. 87; 67
Exit Ticket
1. a. 68; 6, 9, , 6, 8 4. a. 74
b. 69
b. 79; 6, 9, , 7, 9
c. 99
2. a. 41 5. a. 70
b. 87 b. 89
c. 90 c. 90
3. a. 60
b. 72
c. 100

382

Homework
1. a. 89; 1 ten-stick drawn 5. a. 52
b. 71; 1 ten-stick crossed off b. 72
c. 80; 1 cube drawn c. 70
d. 79; 1 cube crossed off d. 79
2. a. 85; 8, 5 e. 99
b. 76; 7, 5, , 7, 6 6. a. 40
b. 50
c. 78; 8, 8, , 7, 8
c. 74
d. 87; 8, 8, , 8, 7 d. 81
3. a. 41 e. 90
b. 51 7. a. 53
c. 66 b. 76
d. 70 c. 60
e. 100 d. 84
4. a. 70 e. 90
b. 80 f. 70
c. 87 g. 77
d. 99 h. 69
e. 100 i. 100
j. 94; 74

383

Lesson 6
Problem Set
1. a. < 3. a. <
b. < b. >
c. > c. =
d. > d. =
e. < e. =
f. > f. =
g. = g. =
h. = h. <
2. a. Is equal to; 29 = 29
b. Is less than; 79 < 80
c. Is greater than; 100 > 10
d. Is less than; 61 < 66
Exit Ticket
a. Is less than; 36 < 63
b. Is greater than; 90 > 89
c. Is equal to; 52 = 52
d. Is less than; 42 < 44
Homework
1. a. > 2. a. Is greater than; 42 > 12
b. < b. Is equal to; 67 = 67
c. > c. Is less than; 37 < 73
d. = d. Is greater than; 34 > 24
e. < e. Is less than; 59 < 95
f. <
g. =
h. <

384

Lesson 7
Problem Set
1. a. 72; 74; 75; 78 3. Sequence (a) circled; 107, 108, 109, 110, 111
b. 85; 88; 90 4. a. 117, 118, 119
c. 92; 95; 98 b. 116, 117, 119
d. 101; 103; 105; 107; 108 c. 102, 103
e. 112; 115; 118; 120 d. 99, 100, 101, 102
2. 98, 99, 100, 101, 102, 103, 104, 105, 106,
107, 108, 109, 110, 111, 112, 113, 114,
115, 116, 117, 118, 119, 120
Exit Ticket
1. a. 89 2. a. 118; 120
b. 98; 100 b. 110, 111, 112
c. 109; 110
d. 118; 120
Homework
1. a. 72; 73; 75; 76; 77; 78 3. Sequence (b) circled; 96, 97, 98, 99, 100, 101
b. 81; 83; 84; 86; 88; 89 4. a. 115, 116, 117
c. 92; 94; 95; 97; 98; 100 b. 117, 118, 119
d. 101; 103; 104; 106; 107; 109 c. 103, 104, 105
e. 112; 113; 115; 117; 118; 120 d. 90, 91, 92, 93
2. 100, 102, 103, 104, 105, 106, 107, 108,
109, 110, 111, 112, 113, 114, 115, 116,
117, 118, 119, 120

385

Lesson 8
Problem Set
1. a. 7, 4 2. a. 9 tens 7 ones
b. 7, 8 b. 10 tens 7 ones
c. 91 c. 110
d. 109 d. 10 tens 5 ones
e. 11, 6 e. 101
f. 10, 3 f. 12 tens 0 ones
g. 112 g. 11 tens 8 ones
h. 120
i. 105
j. 10, 2
Exit Ticket
1. a. 8, 3 2. a. 102
b. 94 b. 114
c. 115
d. 10, 6
Homework
1. a. 8, 1 3. a. 102
b. 9, 8 b. 9 tens 5 ones
c. 117 c. 11 tens 4 ones
d. 108 d. 11 tens 0 ones
e. 10, 4 e. 108
f. 11, 1 f. 10 tens 0 ones
2. a. 92 g. 11 tens 8 ones
b. 84
c. 113
d. 109
e. 101
f. 116

386

Lesson 9
Sprint
Side A
1. 6 11. 28 21. 39
2. 16 12. 18 22. 29
3. 26 13. 8 23. 19
4. 15 14. 19 24. 1
5. 25 15. 29 25. 10
6. 35 16. 39 26. 10
7. 7 17. 10 27. 1
8. 17 18. 20 28. 24
9. 27 19. 30 29. 24
10. 37 20. 40 30. 34
Side B
1. 5 11. 27 21. 39
2. 15 12. 17 22. 29
3. 25 13. 7 23. 19
4. 16 14. 18 24. 1
5. 26 15. 28 25. 10
6. 36 16. 38 26. 10
7. 6 17. 10 27. 1
8. 16 18. 20 28. 29
9. 26 19. 30 29. 29
10. 36 20. 40 30. 39

387

Problem Set
1. 9, 8; 98 6. 11, 9; 119
2. 10, 8; 108 7. 12, 0; 120
3. 11, 8; 118 8. 109; 10 quick tens and 9 ones drawn
4. 10, 5; 105 9. 120; 12 quick tens drawn
5. 11, 6; 116
Exit Ticket
1. 11, 8; 118
2. a. 110; 11 quick tens drawn
b. 101; 10 quick tens and 1 one drawn
Homework
1. 9, 6; 96 6. 10, 7; 107
2. 10, 6; 106 7. 11, 0; 110
3. 11, 6; 116 8. 110; 11 quick tens drawn
4. 10, 9; 109 9. 105; 10 quick tens and 5 ones drawn
5. 12, 0; 120

388

Lesson 10
Recording Sheet
Answers will vary.
Problem Set
1. 2, 5; 50 10. 90 40 = 50
2. 70, 30, 40; 3, 4, 7; 30 + 40 = 70 11. a. 80
3. 80, 50, 30; 8, 3, 5; 80 30 = 50 b. 20
4. 90, 60, 30; 6, 3, 9; 60 + 30 = 90 c. 60
d. 60
5. 90, 70, 20; 9, 2, 7; 90 20 = 70
e. 80
6. 60
f. 20
7. 60 20 = 40 g. 90
8. 70 + 30 = 100 h. 70
9. 100 30 = 70 i. 30
Exit Ticket
1. a. 90 2. 80 30 = 50
b. 20
c. 40
Homework
1. a. Line drawn to number bond 60, 40, ; 20 3. a. 20
b. Line drawn to number bond 90, 30, ; 60 b. 50
c. Line drawn to number sentence 80 = c. 80
60; 20 d. 90
d. Line drawn to number sentence 40 = e. 50
60; 100
f. 40
2. a. 60 g. 80
b. 70 20 = 50 h. 70
c. 70 + 30 = 100 i. 50
d. 60 40 = 20

389

Lesson 11
Problem Set
1. Number bond drawn; 54 + 20 = 74 6. a. 52
2. Number bond drawn; 54 + 40 = 94 b. 98
c. 50
3. Number bond drawn; 38 + 50 = 88
d. 26
4. Number bond drawn; 19 + 80 = 99
5. a. 87
b. 87
c. 65
d. 85
e. 93
f. 79
Exit Ticket
a. 92; quick ten drawing or number bond drawn
b. 87; quick ten drawing or number bond drawn
Homework
1. a. 52 + 10 = 62 3. a. 92
b. 50 + 34 = 84 b. 98
c. 26 + 30 = 56 c. 50
d. 30 + 48 = 78 d. 47
2. a. 78; number bond drawn
b. 84; number bond drawn
c. 86; number bond drawn
d. 87; number bond drawn
e. 88; number bond drawn
f. 95; number bond drawn

390

Lesson 12
Problem Set
1. a. 96 2. a. 58
b. 97 b. 68
c. 79 c. 48
d. 100 d. 50
e. 100 e. 80
f. 80 f. 100
g. 99 g. 99
h. 100 h. 89
Exit Ticket
a. 99
b. 97
Homework
1. a. 68 2. a. 99
b. 97 b. 78
c. 79 c. 98
d. 99 d. 89
e. 100 e. 79
f. 99 f. 88
g. 89 g. 99
h. 99 h. 100

391

Lesson 13
Problem Set
1. a. 91 2. a. 61
b. 91 b. 93
c. 83 c. 96
d. 83 d. 82
e. 93 e. 96
f. 91 f. 95
Exit Ticket
a. 86
b. 94
Homework
1. a. 41 2. a. 81
b. 95 b. 83
c. 82 c. 91
d. 82 d. 96
e. 92 e. 82
f. 88 f. 93
g. 92 g. 92
h. 93 h. 95
i. 91 i. 81

392

Lesson 14
Problem Set
1. a. 69 2. a. 70
b. 70 b. 81
c. 82 c. 100
d. 82 d. 95
e. 91 e. 93
f. 94 f. 82
g. 95 g. 98
h. 97 h. 96
Exit Ticket
a. 89
b. 100
c. 94
Homework
1. a. 89 2. a. 80
b. 91 b. 91
c. 83 c. 100
d. 94 d. 84
e. 93 e. 92
f. 94 f. 94
g. 95 g. 88
h. 87 h. 96

393

Lesson 15
Problem Set
1. a. 71 2. a. 71
b. 93 b. 100
c. 79 c. 82
d. 82 d. 82
e. 93 e. 82
f. 77 f. 95
Exit Ticket
a. 83
b. 93
Homework
1. a. 81 2. a. 84
b. 84 b. 90
c. 79 c. 92
d. 81 d. 92
e. 96 e. 82
f. 85 f. 96

394

Lesson 16
Problem Set
1. a. 72 2. a. 63
b. 83 b. 94
c. 84 c. 92
d. 79 d. 95
e. 83 e. 95
f. 100 f. 97
Exit Ticket
a. 75
b. 95
c. 92
d. 95
Homework
1. a. 84 2. a. 93
b. 92 b. 75
c. 85 c. 91
d. 80 d. 85
e. 86 e. 98
f. 98 f. 97

395

Lesson 17
Problem Set
1. a. 91 2. a. 71
b. 90 b. 79
c. 89 c. 92
d. 94 d. 95
e. 85 e. 100
f. 97 f. 93
Exit Ticket
a. 86
b. 90
c. 93
d. 97
Homework
1. a. 82 2. a. 81
b. 100 b. 89
c. 79 c. 99
d. 94 d. 95
e. 95 e. 100
f. 97 f. 93

396

NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Lesson 18 Answer Key 1 6
Lesson 18
Problem Set
1. 95 4. 92
2. 100 5. 49
3. 80 6. 53
Exit Ticket
Student A work circled; Student B work corrected using number bond under 56 showing 50 and 6;
35 + 50 = 85; 85 + 6 = 91
Homework
1. 76 4. 73
2. 67 5. 85
3. 82 6. 86

397

NYS COMMON CORE MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM Lesson 19 Answer Key 1 6
Lesson 19
Problem Set
1. 64 7. 83
2. 84 8. 81
3. 100 9. 61
4. 100 10. 94
5. 89 11. 68
6. 91 12. 97
Exit Ticket
1. 62
2. 72
Homework
1. 75 7. 74
2. 75 8. 94
3. 90 9. 74
4. 92 10. 94
5. 90 11. 72
6. 100 12. 94

398

Lesson 20
Problem Set
1. a. Dime 3. Hand with 2 dimes crossed off
b. Penny 4. 2 nickels drawn; 1 nickel and 5 pennies drawn
c. Nickel 5. Not correct; 3 cents is less than 5 cents.
2. a. 9 pennies drawn
b. 4 pennies drawn
Exit Ticket
1. a. Matched with the nickel
b. Matched with the dime
2. 5 pennies drawn
Homework
1. Coins appropriately matched 4. a. 20; line drawn to 2 dimes
2. a. 2 pennies crossed off b. 5; line drawn to 1 nickel
b. 7 pennies crossed off c. 10; line drawn to 1 dime
3. 1 nickel drawn; 5 pennies drawn d. 1; line drawn to 1 penny

399

Lesson 21
Problem Set
1. a. 25 pennies drawn 2. a. Quarters
b. Answers will vary. b. Pennies
c. Answers will vary. c. Dimes
d. Answers will vary. d. Nickels
e. 5 nickels drawn 3. Answers will vary.
f. 1 quarter drawn 4. a. Matched with nickel
b. Matched with dime
c. Matched with quarter
Exit Ticket
a. Nickel
b. Penny
c. Quarter
d. Dime
Homework
1. a. Penny 3. Answers will vary.
b. Dime 4. a. Answers will vary.
c. Quarter b. Answers will vary.
d. Nickel
2. a. 10
b. 1
c. 5
d. 25

400

Lesson 22
Problem Set
1. a. Penny 3. Hand with the nickel crossed off
b. Dime 4. Not correct; answers may vary
c. Quarter 5. a. 5 cents, matched with nickel
d. Nickel b. 10 cents, matched with dime
2. a. Matched with dime c. 25 cents, matched with quarter
b. Matched with nickel d. 1 cent, matched with penny
c. Matched with quarter
Exit Ticket
Both sides of coins appropriately matched with name
Homework
1. a. 5, matched with nickels 2. Answers will vary.
b. 10, matched with dimes 3. Answers will vary.
c. 25, matched with quarters
d. 1, matched with pennies

401

Lesson 23
Problem Set
1. a. 3 pennies drawn 2. a. 13 cents
b. 5 pennies drawn b. 12 cents
c. 4 pennies drawn c. 30 cents
d. 5 pennies drawn d. 34 cents
e. 31 cents
Exit Ticket
a. 4 pennies drawn
b. 4 pennies drawn
Homework
1. a. 5 pennies drawn 2. a. 22 cents
b. 3 pennies drawn b. 15 cents
c. 7 pennies drawn c. 27 cents
d. 7 pennies drawn d. 31 cents
e. 32 cents

402

Lesson 24
Problem Set
1. a. 3, 2; 30 + 2 = 32
b. 12, 0; 120 + 0 = 120
c. 11, 4; 110 + 4 = 114
2. a. 8 dimes checked; 8, 0
b. 10 dimes checked; 10, 0
3. Five dimes and eight pennies drawn; 5, 8
Exit Ticket
4, 4; 40 + 4 = 44
Homework
1. a. 2, 1; 20 + 1 = 21
b. 11, 0; 110 + 0 = 110
c. 11, 3; 110 + 3 = 113
2. 11 dimes checked; 11, 0
3. a. 7 dimes and 9 pennies drawn; 7, 9
b. 11 dimes and 8 pennies drawn; 11, 8

403

Lesson 25
Problem Set
1. 10
2. 10
3. 14
4. 13
5. 7
6. 7
Exit Ticket
4
Homework
1. 10
2. 10
3. 14
4. 15
5. 6
6. 8

404

Lesson 26
Problem Set
1. 6
2. 19
3. 2
4. 12
5. 17
6. 6
Exit Ticket
17
Homework
1. 7
2. 17
3. 6
4. 18
5. 11
6. 18

405

Lesson 27
Problem Set
1. 4
2. 11
3. 6
4. 7
5. 18
6. 5
Exit Ticket
12
Homework
1. 4
2. 8
3. 7
4. 6
5. 8
6. 13

406

Lesson 28
Sprint
Side A
1. 2 11. 5 21. 9
2. 3 12. 4 22. 10
3. 4 13. 6 23. 9
4. 3 14. 8 24. 8
5. 1 15. 7 25. 10
6. 4 16. 9 26. 7
7. 5 17. 8 27. 10
8. 4 18. 10 28. 9
9. 6 19. 7 29. 8
10. 7 20. 6 30. 10
Side B
1. 1 11. 8 21. 9
2. 2 12. 6 22. 10
3. 1 13. 5 23. 10
4. 4 14. 7 24. 10
5. 3 15. 6 25. 7
6. 5 16. 8 26. 8
7. 4 17. 9 27. 10
8. 5 18. 7 28. 9
9. 7 19. 8 29. 9
10. 6 20. 10 30. 9

407

Problem Set
1. Answers will vary.
2. Answers will vary.
Homework
1. All boxes checked 3. 87, 67, 57, 47, 37, 27, 17, 7
2. 92, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100, 101, 102, 103, 4. Answers will vary.
104, 106, 107, 108, 109, 110, 111, 112, 113,
114, 115, 116, 117, 118, 120

408

Lesson 29
Number Bond Dash
1. 0 10. 3 19. 6
2. 1 11. 4 20. 7
3. 2 12. 3 21. 10
4. 1 13. 4 22. 9
5. 0 14. 5 23. 8
6. 1 15. 6 24. 6
7. 2 16. 4 25. 8
8. 3 17. 6
9. 2 18. 7

409

Lesson 30
Culminating Activities
Answers will vary.

410


Math g1 m6 Full Module

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document informationmath module 6

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Math g1 m6 Full Module

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Math g1 m6 Full Module

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

New York State Common Core

Topic A: Comparison Word Problems ....................................................................... 10

Topic B: Numbers to 120............................................................................................ 41

Topic C: Addition to 100 Using Place Value Understanding...................................... 132

Mid-Module Assessment and Rubric ....................................................................... 235

Topic E: Coins and Their Values................................................................................ 247

Topic F: Varied Problem Types Within 20 ................................................................ 302

End-of-Module Assessment and Rubric ................................................................... 341

Topic G: Culminating Experiences ............................................................................ 353

Answer Key .............................................................................................................. 375

Module 1: Place Value, Comparison, Addition and Subtraction to 100

2015 Great Minds. eureka-math.org This work is licensed under a

Module 1: Place Value, Comparison, Addition and Subtraction to 100

2015 Great Minds. eureka-math.org This work is licensed under a

Notes on Pacing for Differentiation

Module 1: Place Value, Comparison, Addition and Subtraction to 100

2015 Great Minds. eureka-math.org This work is licensed under a

Extend the counting sequence.

understanding and properties of operations to add and subtract.

Module 1: Place Value, Comparison, Addition and Subtraction to 100

2015 Great Minds. eureka-math.org This work is licensed under a

Focus Standards for Mathematical Practice

Module 1: Place Value, Comparison, Addition and Subtraction to 100

2015 Great Minds. eureka-math.org This work is licensed under a

Module 1: Place Value, Comparison, Addition and Subtraction to 100

2015 Great Minds. eureka-math.org This work is licensed under a

Lesson 11: Add a multiple of 10 to any two-digit number within 100.

D Varied Place Value Strategies for Addition to 100 2

Mid-Module Assessment: Topics AD (assessment 1 day, return 1 day, 3

End-of-Module Assessment: Topics AF (assessment 1 day, return day, 2

Module 1: Place Value, Comparison, Addition and Subtraction to 100

2015 Great Minds. eureka-math.org This work is licensed under a

<, >, = (less than, greater than, equal to)

Module 1: Place Value, Comparison, Addition and Subtraction to 100

2015 Great Minds. eureka-math.org This work is licensed under a

Module 1: Place Value, Comparison, Addition and Subtraction to 100

2015 Great Minds. eureka-math.org This work is licensed under a

Topic A: Comparison Word Problems

2015 Great Minds. eureka-math.org This work is licensed under a

Topic A: Comparison Word Problems

2015 Great Minds. eureka-math.org This work is licensed under a

A Teaching Sequence Toward Mastery of Comparison Word Problems

Objective 1: Solve compare with difference unknown problem types.

Objective 2: Solve compare with bigger or smaller unknown problem types.

Topic A: Comparison Word Problems

2015 Great Minds. eureka-math.org This work is licensed under a

Suggested Lesson Structure

Fluency Practice (12 minutes)

Core Fluency Differentiated Practice Sets 1.OA.6 (5 minutes)

Core Fluency Differentiated Practice Sets (5 minutes)

Number Bond Addition and Subtraction (5 minutes)

Lesson 1: Solve compare with difference unknown problem types.

2015 Great Minds. eureka-math.org This work is licensed under a

Happy Counting (2 minutes)

T/S: 97 96 (pause) 97 98 (pause) 99 100 99 100 (etc.)

Concept Development (38 minutes)

Lesson 1: Solve compare with difference unknown problem types.

2015 Great Minds. eureka-math.org This work is licensed under a